Manual Civic

2006 Civic 2 Door
Owner’s Manual
(Unlinked)
This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web us. This is
due to changes in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This
manual will be replaced with a hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.
© 2006 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 31SVA600
０５／０８／０２１３：１３：１９３１ＳＶＡ６０００００１
Main Menu
Owner’s Identification
OWNER This owner’s manual should be considered

a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of

ADDRESS the Civic 2-door. You may find descriptions
STREET of equipment and features that are not on
your particular model.
The information and specifications included

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ in this publication were in effect at the time
POSTAL CODE of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
V. I. N. Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
DELIVERY DATE without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME DEALER NO. POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN

AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
ADDRESS en français, veuillez demander à
STREET votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
33SVAC00
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
０５／０８／０２１３：１３：２８３１ＳＶＡ６０００００２
Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2006 Honda Civic was a wise investment. As you read this manual, you will
It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights WARNING: This product contains
and responsibilities. or emits chemicals known to the
state of California to cause cancer
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual and birth defects or other
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. reproductive harm.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff
is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Event Data Recorders
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns. This vehicle is equipped with one or
more recording devices commonly
referred to as event data recorders
or sensing and diagnostic modules.
i
０５／０８／０２１３：１３：４１３１ＳＶＡ６０００００３
Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility. Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
To help you make informed three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
hazards associated with operating or instructions.
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement. Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
ii
０５／０８／０２１３：１３：５４３１ＳＶＡ６０００００４
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column) ........................................... 53
Features (heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, security, and cruise control) ........................................ 109
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 179
Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 191
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage).................................................. 207
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses) ................................................ 251
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controls) ....................................... 275
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information)................... 287
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 291
Index ................................................................................................................................................. I
INDEX
Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures) ................................................... last page
1
０５／０８／０２１３：１４：１７３１ＳＶＡ６０００００５
Main Menu
Overview of Contents
Contents Before Driving Warranty and Customer

A convenient reference to the What gasoline to use, how to break- Relations
sections in this manual. in your new vehicle, and how to load (U.S. and Canada only)
luggage and other cargo. A summary of the warranties
Your Vehicle at a Glance covering your new vehicle, and how
A quick reference to the main Driving to contact us for any reason. Refer to
controls in your vehicle. The proper way to start the engine, your warranty manual for detailed
shift the transmission, and park. information.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the Maintenance Authorized Manuals
proper use and care of your vehicle’s The maintenance minder shows you (U.S. only)
seat belts, an overview of the when you need to take your vehicle How to order manuals and other
Supplemental Restraint System, and to the dealer for maintenance service. technical literature.
valuable information on how to There is also a list of things to check
protect children with child restraints. and instructions on how to check Index
them.
Instruments and Controls Service Information Summary
Explains the purpose of each Taking Care of the Unexpected A summary of the information you
instrument panel indicator and gauge, This section covers several problems need when you pull up to the fuel
and how to use the controls on the motorists sometimes experience, pump.
dashboard and steering column. and details how to handle them.
Features Technical Information

How to operate the heating and air ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
conditioning system, the audio and technical information.
system, and other convenience
features.
2
０５／０８／０２１３：１４：２５３１ＳＶＡ６０００００６
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL HAZARD WARNING MOONROOF SWITCH (P.98)

INDICATORS (P.55) BUTTON (P.72)
GAUGES (P.63) CLOCK (P.173)
DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG

(P.9, 23)
PASSENGER’S FRONT
MIRROR CONTROLS AIRBAG (P.9, 23)
(P.100)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.115)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.77)
HEATING/COOLING
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
SWITCHES (P.110)
(P.96)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.182) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FUEL FILL DOOR/ ACCESSORY POWER (P.198)
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE SOCKETS MANUAL TRANSMISSION
A/T model is shown. (P.181, 88) (P.104) (P.195)
3
０５／０８／０２１８：２１：３２３１ＳＶＡ６０００００７
Main Menu
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

(P.70) (P.69) PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR (P.29)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P.71)
DISPLAY CHANGE
BUTTON
(P.64)
SEL/RESET BUTTON
(P.63)
REAR WINDOW
MIRROR CONTROLS DEFOGGER
(P.100) (P.72)
HEATED MIRRORS＊3
(P.101)
HORN＊2 HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
TILT/ (P.72)
REMOTE TELESCOPIC
AUDIO
＊3 ADJUSTMENT
CONTROLS (P.73)
(P.170) CRUISE ACCESSORY POWER
CONTROL SOCKET
BUTTONS＊3 (P.104)
＊1
VOICE CONTROL SWITCHES (P.175)
＊1 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
＊2 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊3 : If equipped.
4
０５／０８／０２１３：１４：４０３１ＳＶＡ６０００００８
Main Menu
This section gives you important Additional Information About All Children Should Sit in a
information about how to protect Your Seat Belts ........................ 18 Back Seat .................................. 33
yourself and your passengers. It Seat Belt System Components ... 18 The Passenger’s Front Airbag
shows you how to use seat belts. It Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 19 Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 33

explains how your airbags work. And Automatic Seat Belt If You Must Drive with Several
it tells you how to properly restrain Tensioners ................................ 19 Children .................................... 35
infants and children in your vehicle. Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 20 If a Child Requires Close
Additional Information About Attention ................................... 35
Your Airbags ............................ 21 Additional Safety Precautions .... 35
Airbag System Components ....... 21 Protecting Infants and Small
How Your Front Airbags Children .................................... 37
Work.......................................... 23 Protecting Infants ........................ 37
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 26 Protecting Small Children .......... 38
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 How the Side Curtain Airbags Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 39
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7 Work.......................................... 28 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 40
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 28 With LATCH ................................ 41
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11 How the Side Airbag Off With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 43
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 11 Indicator Works ....................... 29 With a Tether ............................... 45
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 12 How the Passenger Airbag Off Protecting Larger Children ............ 46
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 13 Indicator Works ....................... 29 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 46
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Airbag Service .............................. 30 Using a Booster Seat ................... 47
Belts ...................................... 14 Additional Safety Precautions .... 31 When Can a Larger Child Sit in
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Protecting Children − General Front .......................................... 48
Position ................................. 15 Guidelines ................................. 32 Additional Safety Precautions .... 49
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16 All Children Must Be Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 50
Additional Safety Precautions .... 16 Restrained ................................ 32 Safety Labels .................................... 51
5
０５／０８／０２１３：１４：５４３１ＳＶＡ６０００００９
Main Menu Table of Contents
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety Restrain All Children every additional drink. So don’t drink
recommendations throughout this Children age 12 and under should and drive, and don’t let your friends
section, and throughout this manual. ride properly restrained in a back drink and drive, either.
The recommendations on this page seat, not the front seat. Infants and
are the ones we consider to be the small children should be restrained Control Your Speed
most important. in a child seat. Larger children Excessive speed is a major factor in
should use a booster seat and a lap/ crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
Always Wear Your Seat Belt shoulder belt until they can use the the higher the speed, the greater the
A seat belt is your best protection in belt properly without a booster seat risk, but serious injuries can also
all types of collisions. Airbags are (see pages 32 − 49 ). occur at lower speeds. Never drive
designed to supplement seat belts, faster than is safe for current
not replace them. So even though Be Aware of Airbag Hazards conditions, regardless of the
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, While airbags can save lives, they maximum speed posted.
make sure you and your passengers can cause serious or fatal injuries to
always wear your seat belts, and occupants who sit too close to them, Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
wear them properly (see page 14 ). or are not properly restrained. Condition
Infants, young children, and short Having a tire blowout or a
adults are at the greatest risk. Be mechanical failure can be extremely
sure to follow all instructions and hazardous. To reduce the possibility
warnings in this manual. of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
Don’t Drink and Drive and perform all regularly scheduled
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even maintenance (see page 209 ).
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
6
０５／０８／０２１３：１５：０２３１ＳＶＡ６００００１０
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(1) (3) (4) (6) (9) features that work together to
(8) protect you and your passengers
(11) during a crash.

(7) Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
(5) strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
(2) and tensioners that tighten the front
(10) seat belts in a crash.
(12) (8)
(7) However, you and your passengers
(1) Safety Cage can’t take full advantage of these
(2) Crush Zone
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs features unless you remain sitting in
(2) (4) Head Restraints a proper position and always wear
(5) Collapsible Steering Column your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags features can contribute to injuries if
(8) Side Airbags they are not used properly.
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners The following pages explain how you
(11) Door Locks
(12) Front Seat Belt Buckle can take an active role in protecting
Tensioners yourself and your passengers.
7
０５／０８／０２１３：１５：１６３１ＳＶＡ６００００１１
Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Your vehicle is equipped with seat against the inside of the vehicle
belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly and against other occupants.
increases the chance of serious
Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even Keep you from being thrown out
an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has airbags. of the vehicle.
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts. Be sure you and your Help keep you in a good position
passengers always wear seat should the airbags ever deploy. A
Why Wear Seat Belts belts and wear them properly. good position reduces the risk of
Seat belts are the single most injury from an inflating airbag and
effective safety device for adults and allows you to get the best
larger children. (Infants and smaller When properly worn, seat belts: advantage from the airbag.
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.) Keep you connected to the vehicle Of course, seat belts cannot
so you can take advantage of the completely protect you in every
Not wearing a seat belt properly vehicle’s built-in safety features. crash. But in most cases, seat belts
increases the chance of serious can reduce your risk of serious
injury or death in a crash, even Help protect you in almost every injury.
though your vehicle has airbags. type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and What You Should Do:
In addition, most states and all rollovers. Always wear your seat belt, and
Canadian provinces require you to make sure you wear it properly.
wear seat belts.
8
０５／０８／０２１３：１５：２７３１ＳＶＡ６００００１２
Airbags

Your vehicle has a supplemental Your vehicle also has side airbags to Your vehicle also has side curtain
restraint system (SRS) with front help protect the upper torso of the airbags to help protect the heads of
airbags to help protect the heads and driver or a front seat passenger the driver, front passenger, and
chests of the driver and a front seat during a moderate to severe side passengers in the outer rear seating
passenger during a moderate to impact (see page 26 for more positions during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page information on how your side airbags severe side impact (see page 28 for
23 for more information on how work). more information on how your side
your front airbags work). curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
9
０５／０８／０２１３：１５：３５３１ＳＶＡ６００００１３
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear The rest of this section gives more
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit detailed information about how you
upright and as far back from the can maximize your safety.
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A Remember, however, that no safety
the seat belts. front passenger should move their system can prevent all injuries or
seat as far back from the dashboard deaths that can occur in a severe
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible. crash, even when seat belts are
impacts, or minor frontal or side properly worn and the airbags deploy.
collisions.
Airbags can pose hazards. To do

their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
10
０５／０８／０２１８：２１：４５３１ＳＶＡ６００００１４
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Locking the doors reduces the 2.Adjust the Front Seats
The following pages provide chance of someone being thrown out
instructions on how to properly of the vehicle during a crash, and it
protect the driver, adult passengers, helps prevent passengers from

and teenage children who are large accidentally opening a door and
enough and mature enough to drive falling out.
or ride in the front.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
See pages 32 − 36 for important an outsider from unexpectedly
guidelines on how to properly opening a door when you come to a
protect infants, small children, and stop.
larger children who ride in your
vehicle. See page 77 for how to lock the
doors, and page 61 for how the door
1.Close and Lock the Doors monitor indicator works. Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
After everyone has entered the rear as possible while allowing you to
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed Some models have auto door maintain full control of the vehicle.
and locked. locking/unlocking features. For Have a front passenger adjust their
more information, see page 78 . seat as far to the rear as possible.
Your vehicle has a door-
open indicator on the
instrument panel to indicate when
either door is not tightly closed.
CONTINUED
11
０５／０８／０２１３：１６：００３１ＳＶＡ６００００１５
If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious
wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the rock it back and forth to make sure
steering wheel up and down, and in the seat is locked in position.
and out (see page 73 ). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
See page 90 for how to adjust the comfortable, upright position,
If you cannot get far enough away front seats. leaving ample space between your
from the steering wheel and still chest and the airbag cover in the
reach the controls, we recommend center of the steering wheel.
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help. Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
12
０５／０８／０２１３：１６：１２３１ＳＶＡ６００００１６
4.Adjust the Head Restraints When a passenger is seated in the

rear center seating position, make
Reclining the seat-back too far sure the head restraint is adjusted to
can result in serious injury or its highest position.

death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an

upright position, and sit well Improperly positioning head
back in the seat. restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer Make sure head restraints are
rests against the occupant’s chest in place and positioned properly
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver’s head restraint so before driving.
the belt. It also increases the chance the back of your head rests against
of sliding under the belt in a crash the center of the restraint.
and being seriously injured. The Properly adjusted head restraints
farther a seat-back is reclined, the Have passengers adjust their head will help protect occupants from
greater the risk of injury. restraints properly as well. Taller whiplash and other crash injuries.
persons should adjust their restraint
See page 90 for how to adjust the as high as possible. See page 93 for how to adjust the
seat-backs. head restraints.
CONTINUED
13
０５／０８／０２１３：１６：２０３１ＳＶＡ６００００１７
5.Fasten and Position the Seat This spreads the forces of a crash
Belts over the strongest bones in your
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, upper body.
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious Improperly positioning the seat
injuries in a crash. belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are

properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again

to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
14
０５／０８／０２１３：１６：３０３１ＳＶＡ６００００１８
Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting In addition, an occupant who is out of
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position position in the front seat can be
behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted seriously or fatally injured in a crash
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and put on seat belts, it is by striking interior parts of the

very important that they continue to vehicle or being struck by an
If a seat belt does not seem to work sit upright, well back in their seats, inflating front airbag.
properly, it may not protect the with their feet on the floor, until the
occupant in a crash. vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
No one should sit in a seat with an Sitting improperly or out of
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat Sitting improperly can increase the position can result in serious
belt that is not working properly can chance of injury during a crash. For injury or death in a crash.
result in serious injury or death. example, if an occupant slouches,
Have your dealer check the belt as lies down, turns sideways, sits Always sit upright, well back in
soon as possible. forward, leans forward or sideways, the seat, with your feet on the
or puts one or both feet up, the floor.
See page 18 for additional chance of injury during a crash is
information about your seat belts greatly increased.
and how to take care of them.
15
０５／０８／０２１３：１６：４１３１ＳＶＡ６００００１９
Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit Additional Safety Precautions
upright and adjust the seat as far Two people should never use the
back as possible while allowing full same seat belt. If they do, they
control of the vehicle. When riding could be very seriously injured in a
as a front passenger, adjust the seat crash.
as far back as possible.
Do not put any accessories on seat
This will reduce the risk of injuries belts. Devices intended to improve
to both you and your unborn child occupant comfort or reposition the
that can be caused by a crash or an shoulder part of a seat belt can
inflating front airbag. reduce the protective capability of
the belt and increase the chance of
Each time you have a checkup, ask serious injury in a crash.
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
If you are pregnant, the best way to drive. Do not place hard or sharp objects
protect yourself and your unborn between yourself and a front
child when driving or riding in a airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt, objects on your lap, or driving with
and keep the lap part of the belt as a pipe or other sharp object in
low as possible across the hips. your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
16
０５／０８／０２１３：１６：４７３１ＳＶＡ６００００２０
Keep your hands and arms away Never let passengers ride on top of
from the airbag covers. If your a folded-down rear seat. If they do,
hands or arms are close to an they could be very seriously
airbag cover, they could be injured injured in a crash.

if the airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on

the front airbag covers. Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not attach hard objects on or

near a door. If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
17
０５／０８／０２１３：１７：００３１ＳＶＡ６００００２１
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components If a front passenger does not fasten The seat belts use the same
Your seat belt system includes lap/ their seat belt, the indicator will monitoring system as the front
shoulder belts in all five seating come on about 6 seconds after the airbags. The system may not work
positions. The front seat belts are ignition switch is turned to the ON properly under these conditions:
also equipped with automatic seat (II) position.
belt tensioners. Placing heavy items on the front
If either the driver or a front passenger’s seat.
The seat belt system passenger does not fasten their seat
includes an indicator on the belt while driving, the beeper will The front passenger is not sitting
instrument panel and a beeper to sound and the indicator will flash properly.
remind you and your passengers to again at regular intervals.
fasten your seat belts. The front passenger’s seat-back is
When no one is sitting in the front pressed forward by a folded-down
This system monitors the front seat passenger’s seat, or a small child is rear seat.
belts. riding there, the indicator will not
If you turn the ignition switch to the come on and the beeper will not Have your vehicle checked by a
ON (II) position before your seat sound. dealer if the indicator comes on or
belt is fastened, the beeper will the beeper sounds when there is no
sound and the indicator will flash. If front passenger or objects on the
your seat belt is not fastened before front seat.
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
18
０５／０８／０２１３：１７：１２３１ＳＶＡ６００００２２
Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The lap and shoulder belt goes over locking retractor. In normal driving,
your shoulder, across your chest, the retractor lets you move freely in
and across your hips. your seat while it keeps some

tension on the belt. During a collision
To fasten the belt, insert the latch or sudden stop, the retractor
plate into the buckle, then tug on the automatically locks the belt to help
belt to make sure the buckle is restrain your body.
latched (see page 14 for how to
properly position the belt). The seat belts in all seating positions
except the driver’s have an additional
To unlock the belt, press the red locking mechanism that must be
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide activated to secure a child seat (see
the belt across your body so that it page 43 ).
retracts completely. After exiting the For added protection, the front seat
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the If the shoulder part of the belt is belts are equipped with automatic
way and will not get closed in the pulled all the way out, the locking seat belt tensioners. When activated,
door. mechanism will activate. The belt the tensioners immediately tighten
will retract, but it will not allow the the belts to help hold the driver and
passenger to move freely. a front passenger in place.
To deactivate the locking

mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the seat belt, pull it out only
as far as needed. CONTINUED
19
０５／０８／０２１３：１７：２４３１ＳＶＡ６００００２３
The tensioners are designed to Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
activate in any collision severe For safety, you should check the it must be replaced by your dealer. A
enough to cause the front airbags to condition of your seat belts regularly. belt that has been worn during a
deploy. crash may not provide the same level
Pull each belt out fully, and look for of protection in a subsequent crash.
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
deploys during a side impact, the that the latches work smoothly and The dealer should also inspect the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle the belts retract easily. If a belt does anchors for damage and replace
will also deploy. not retract easily, cleaning the belt them if needed. If the automatic seat
may correct the problem (see page belt tensioners activate during a
The tensioners can also be activated 237 ). Any belt that is not in good crash, they must be replaced.
during a collision in which the front condition or working properly will
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the not provide good protection and
airbags would not be needed, but the should be replaced as soon as
additional restraint could be helpful. possible. Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
When the tensioners are activated, Honda provides a lifetime warranty injury or death if the seat belts
the seat belts will remain tight until on seat belts for U.S. models. See do not work properly when
they are unbuckled in the normal your Honda Warranty Information needed.
manner. booklet for details.
Check your seat belts regularly,
If the front seat belt tensioners ever and have any problem
activate, they must be replaced as corrected as soon as possible.
the belts will no longer retract
properly.
20
０５／０８／０２１３：１７：３１３１ＳＶＡ６００００２４
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(8) (12) (8) (9) (17) (2) (13) (17)

(11)

(5)
(10)
(1) Driver’s Airbag (1) (4)

(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags (3)
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(7) (16)
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(12) SRS Indicator (15)
(13) Occupant Detection System (ODS) Unit
(14) Front Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners (10)
(15) Rear Safing Sensor (6)
(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second) (5) (16) (4) (14)
(17) Side Curtain Airbags
CONTINUED
21
０５／０８／０２１３：１７：４４３１ＳＶＡ６００００２５
Your airbag system includes: Sensors that can detect a A sophisticated electronic system
Two SRS (supplemental restraint moderate to severe front impact or that continually monitors and
system) front airbags. The driver’s side impact. records information about the
airbag is stored in the center of sensors, the control unit, the
the steering wheel; the front Sensors that can detect whether a airbag activators, the seat belt
passenger’s airbag is stored in the child is in the passenger’s side tensioners, and driver and front
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS airbag path and signal the control passenger seat belt use when the
AIRBAG’’ (see page 23 ). unit to turn the airbag off (see ignition switch is in the ON (II)
page 27 ). position.
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front A driver’s seat position sensor that An indicator on the instrument
passenger. The airbags are stored monitors the distance of the seat panel that alerts you to a possible
in the outer edges of the seat- from the front airbag. If the seat is problem with your airbags,
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE too far forward, the airbag will sensors, or seat belt tensioners
AIRBAG’’ (see page 26 ). inflate with less force (see page (see page 28 ).
25 ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for An indicator on the instrument
each side of the vehicle. The Weight sensors that monitor the panel that alerts you that the
airbags are stored in the ceiling, weight on the front passenger’s passenger’s side airbag has been
above the side windows. The front seat. If the weight of an infant or turned off (see page 29 ).
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE small child is detected, the
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page passenger’s front airbag will be
28 ). turned off (see page 25 ).
Automatic front seat belt

tensioners (see page 19 ).
22
０５／０８／０２１３：１７：５６３１ＳＶＡ６００００２６
An indicator on the dashboard that How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
alerts you that the passenger’s restrains your lower body and torso,
front airbag has been turned off and the front airbag helps protect
(see page 29 ). your head and chest.

Emergency backup power in case Although both airbags normally
your vehicle’s electrical system is inflate within split second of each
disconnected in a crash. other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a

collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the
detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front
inflate the driver’s and front seat, or if the advanced airbag
passenger’s airbags, at the time and system has turned the passenger’s
with the force needed. airbag off (see page 25 ).
CONTINUED
23
０５／０８／０２１３：１８：０８３１ＳＶＡ６００００２７
After a crash, you may see what Dual-Threshold Airbags

looks like smoke. This is actually Your front airbags are also dual-
powder from the airbag’s surface. threshold airbags. Airbags with this
Although the powder is not harmful, feature have two deployment
people with respiratory problems thresholds that depend on whether
may experience some temporary or not the occupant is wearing a seat
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of belt.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
Dual-Stage Airbags lower threshold, because the
Your front airbags are dual-stage occupant would need extra
airbags. This means they have two protection.
inflation stages that can be ignited
After inflating, the front airbags sequentially or simultaneously, If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
immediately deflate, so they won’t depending on crash severity. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
interfere with the driver’s visibility, threshold, when the airbag would be
or the ability to steer or operate In a more severe crash, both stages needed to supplement the protection
other controls. will ignite simultaneously to provide provided by the seat belt.
the quickest and greatest protection.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so In a less severe crash, one stage will
fast that most occupants are not ignite first, then the second stage
aware that the airbags deployed until will ignite a split second later. This
they see them lying in their laps. provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
24
０５／０８／０２１３：１８：２１３１ＳＶＡ６００００２８
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-

caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work

properly: DRIVER’S PASSENGER’S
SEAT SEAT WEIGHT
POSITION SENSORS
Occupants must sit upright and SENSOR
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or The driver’s advanced front airbag The passenger’s advanced front
under the seats, cover the sensors, system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
or put any cargo or metal objects sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Honda
under the front seats. too far forward, the airbag will does not encourage carrying an
inflate with less force, regardless of infant or small child in the front, if
Back-seat passengers should not the severity of the impact. the sensors detect the weight of an
put their feet under the front seats. infant or small child, the system will
If there is a problem with the sensor, automatically turn the passenger’s
Failure to follow these instructions the SRS Indicator will come on, and front airbag off.
could damage the sensors or prevent the airbag will inflate in the normal
them from working properly. manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
CONTINUED
25
０５／０８／０２１３：１８：３３３１ＳＶＡ６００００２９
When the airbag is turned off, an Moving the front seat forcibly How Your Side Airbags Work
indicator in the center of the back against cargo on the seat or
dashboard will come on indicating floor behind it.
passenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page
29 ). Moving the front seat forcibly
back on the folded rear seat.
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the The rear seat-back interfering
airbag will be off. However, the with the reclined front passenger’s
passenger airbag off indicator will seat-back when the rear seat is
not come on. folded down.
To ensure that the passenger’s Hanging heavy items on the front

advanced front airbag system will passenger seat, or placing heavy
work properly, do not do anything items in the seat-back pocket. If you ever have a moderate to
that would increase or decrease the severe side impact, sensors will
weight on the front passenger’s seat. If your vehicle is equipped with detect rapid deceleration and signal
This includes: the floor mats, make sure the floor the control unit to instantly inflate
mat behind the front passenger’s either the driver’s or the passenger’s
A rear passenger pushing or seat is hooked to the floor mat side airbag.
pulling on the back of the front anchor (see page 238 ). If it is not,
passenger’s seat. the mat may interfere with the
proper operation of the sensors
and operation of the seat.
26
０５／０８／０２１３：１８：４４３１ＳＶＡ６００００３０
Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the side airbag off indicator comes
side impact. If the impact is on the Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff on (see page 29 ), have the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s system designed primarily to protect passenger sit upright. Once the
side airbag will deploy even if there a child riding in the front passenger’s passenger is out of the airbag’s

is no passenger. seat. deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
To get the best protection from the Although Honda does not encourage indicator will go out.
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, if sensors in
should wear their seat belts and sit the seat detect a child has leaned There will be some delay between
upright and well back in their seats. into the side airbag’s deployment the moment the passenger moves
path, the airbag will shut off. into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
The side airbag may also shut off if a on or goes off.
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans A front seat passenger should not
sideways into the airbag’s use a cushion or other object as a
deployment path. backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
27
０５／０８／０２１３：１８：５７３１ＳＶＡ６００００３１
How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger’s How the SRS Indicator Works
Work side, the passenger’s side curtain The SRS indicator alerts
airbag will inflate even if there are no you to a potential problem
occupants on that side of the vehicle. with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants When you turn the ignition switch to
should wear their seat belts and sit the ON (II) position, this indicator
upright and well back in their seats. comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
If the indicator comes on at any

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
In a moderate to severe side impact, by your dealer. For example:
sensors will detect rapid deceleration
and signal the control unit to If the SRS indicator does not come
instantly inflate the side curtain on after you turn the ignition
airbag on the driver’s or the switch to the ON (II) position.
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or

flashes on and off while you drive.
28
０５／０８／０２１３：１９：０９３１ＳＶＡ６００００３２
If you see any of these indications, How the Side Airbag Off How the Passenger Airbag Off
the airbags and seat belt tensioners Indicator Works Indicator Works
may not work properly when you U.S. Canada
need them. PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

This indicator alerts you that the U.S.
passenger’s side airbag has been
Ignoring the SRS indicator can automatically shut off. It does not
result in serious injury or death mean there is a problem with your
if the airbag systems or side airbags.
Canada
tensioners do not work properly.
When you turn the ignition switch to
Have your vehicle checked by a the ON (II) position, the indicator
dealer as soon as possible if should come on briefly and then go
the SRS indicator alerts you to off (see page 58 ). If it doesn’t come
a possible problem. on, stays on, or comes on while This indicator alerts you that the
driving without a passenger in the passenger’s front airbag has been
front seat, have the system checked. shut off because weight sensors
detect an infant or small child may
be in the front passenger’s seat. It
does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
CONTINUED
29
０５／０８／０２１３：１９：２０３１ＳＶＡ６００００３３
If no one is riding in the front seat, Airbag Service The SRS indicator alerts you to a
the airbag will be automatically shut Your airbag systems are virtually problem. Take your vehicle to an
off. However, the indicator will not maintenance free, and there are no authorized dealer as soon as
come on. parts you can safely service. possible. If you ignore this
However, you must have your indication, your airbags may not
If the indicator comes on with no vehicle serviced if: operate properly.
passenger in the front, or with an
adult in the seat, there may be a An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag If your vehicle has a moderate to
problem with the advanced airbag that has deployed must be severe impact. Even if your
system. Have the vehicle checked by replaced along with the control airbags do not inflate, your dealer
your dealer as soon as possible. unit and other related parts. Any should inspect the driver’s seat
seat belt tensioner that activates position sensor, the front
The passenger airbag off indicator must also be replaced. passenger’s weight sensors, the
may also come on and off repeatedly front seat belt tensioners, and all
if total weight on the seat is near the Do not try to remove or replace seat belts worn during the crash to
airbag cutoff threshold. any airbag by yourself. This must make sure they are operating
be done by your dealer or a properly.
If this happens, have the passenger knowledgeable body shop.
ride properly restrained in the back
seat. If the passenger must ride in
front, move the seat as far to the
rear as possible, have the passenger
sit upright and wear the seat belt
properly.
30
０５／０８／０２１３：１９：２９３１ＳＶＡ６００００３４
Additional Safety Precautions Do not cover or replace front seat- Do not recline the front passenger’s
Do not attempt to deactivate your back covers without consulting seat-back as far to the rear as
airbags. Together, airbags and your dealer. Improperly replacing possible with the right rear seat
seat belts provide the best or covering front seat-back covers folded down. This will cause the

protection. can prevent your side airbags from front passenger’s weight sensors
inflating during a side impact. to work improperly. The system
Do not tamper with airbag may shut off the front passenger’s
components or wiring for any Do not expose the front passenger’s airbag and the passenger airbag
reason. Tampering could cause seat-back to liquid. If water or off indicator will come on. The
the airbags to deploy, possibly another liquid soaks into the seat- seat belt reminder indicator for a
causing very serious injury. back, it can prevent the side airbag front seat passenger may also
cutoff system from working work improperly.
Do not remove or modify a front properly.
seat without consulting your Make sure that the folded-down
dealer. This could make the rear seat does not press the front
driver’s seat position sensor or the passenger’s seat-back. Check the
front passenger’s weight sensors passenger airbag off indicator to
ineffective. If it is necessary to confirm that the passenger’s
remove or modify a front seat to advanced front airbag is operating
accommodate a person with properly.
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
31
０５／０８／０２１４：３４：０７３１ＳＶＡ６００００３５
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children ages 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly
Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 46 − 49 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 37 − 45 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
32
０５／０８／０２１４：３４：２１３１ＳＶＡ６００００３６
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Can Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can

safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. The National Highway the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is
Traffic Safety Administration and large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
Transport Canada recommend that force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
all children age 12 and under be child with enough force to kill or
properly restrained in a back seat. Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
advanced front airbag system that
Children who ride in back are less automatically turns the passenger’s Larger Children
likely to be injured by striking front airbag off (see page 25 ), Children who have outgrown child
interior vehicle parts during a please follow these guidelines: seats are also at risk of being injured
collision or hard braking. Also, or killed by an inflating passenger’s
children cannot be injured by an Infants front airbag. Whenever possible,
inflating front airbag when they ride Never put a rear-facing child seat in larger children should sit in the back
in the back. the front seat of a vehicle equipped seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
with a passenger’s front airbag. If be properly restrained with a seat
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back belt (see page 46 for important
of the child seat with enough force information about protecting larger
to kill or very seriously injure an children).
infant.
CONTINUED
33
０５／０８／０２１４：３４：３８３１ＳＶＡ６００００３７
To remind you of the passenger’s U.S. Models DASHBOARD

front airbag hazards, and that SUN VISOR
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISOR
34
０５／０８／０２１４：３４：５４３１ＳＶＡ６００００３８
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close Additional Safety Precautions
Children Attention Never hold an infant or child on
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put your lap. If you are not wearing a
children can be properly restrained. an infant or small child in the front seat belt in a crash, you could be

If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the thrown forward and crush the
children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires child against the dashboard or a
front: attention. seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat from your arms and be seriously
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a hurt or killed.
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 46 ). attention to a child distracts the Never put a seat belt over yourself
driver from the important tasks of and a child. During a crash, the
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk. belt could press deep into the child
rear as possible (see page 90 ). and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If a child requires close physical
Have the child sit upright and well attention or frequent visual contact, Never let two children use the
back in the seat (see page 15 ). we strongly recommend that another same seat belt. If they do, they
adult ride with the child in the back could be very seriously injured in a
Make sure the seat belt is properly seat. The back seat is far safer for a crash.
positioned and secured (see page child than the front.
14 ).
CONTINUED
35
０５／０８／０２１４：３５：００３１ＳＶＡ６００００３９
Do not leave children alone in a Keep vehicle keys/remote

vehicle. Leaving children without transmitters out of the reach of
adult supervision is illegal in most children. Even very young
states and Canadian provinces, children learn how to unlock
and can be very hazardous. vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the trunk, which
For example, infants and small can lead to accidental injury or
children left in a vehicle on a hot death.
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Lock both doors and the trunk

when your vehicle is not in use.
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature (see page 89 ).
36
０５／０８／０２１４：３５：１３３１ＳＶＡ６００００４０
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a

rear-facing child seat in the front
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat.
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be If the passenger’s front airbag
very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the
frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-

facing child seat may prevent the
Child Seat Type driver or a front passenger from
An infant must be properly moving their seat as far back as
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining recommended, or from locking their
child seat until the child reaches the seat-back in the desired position.
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat and the child is at least Or, it can interfere with proper
one year old. operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
37
０５／０８／０２１４：３５：２５３１ＳＶＡ６００００４１
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small
strongly recommend that you install child use the child seat until the child
the child seat directly behind the reaches the weight or height limit
front passenger’s seat, move the seat for the seat.
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get Child Seat Placement
a smaller rear-facing child seat. We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a rear-facing child seat Placing a forward-facing child seat in

in the front seat can result in the front seat of a vehicle equipped
serious injury or death during a with a passenger’s airbag can be
collision. hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
Always place a rear-facing child Child Seat Type thrown forward during a collision, an
seat in the back seat, not the A child who is at least one year old, inflating airbag can strike the child
front. and who fits within the child seat with enough force to cause very
maker’s weight and height limits, serious or fatal injuries.
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat. Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
Of the different seats available, we passenger’s front airbag off (see
recommend those that have a five- page 25 ), a back seat is the safest
point harness system as shown. place for a small child.
38
０５／０８／０２１４：３５：３７３１ＳＶＡ６００００４２
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
If it is necessary to put a forward- Selecting a Child Seat In seating positions and vehicles not
facing child seat in the front, move When buying a child seat, you need equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as to choose either a conventional child compatible child seat can be installed
possible, and be sure the child seat is seat, or one designed for use with using a seat belt.

firmly secured to the vehicle and the the lower anchors and tethers for
child is properly strapped in the seat. children (LATCH) system. Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
Conventional child seats must be seat should meet three
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, requirements:
Placing a forward-facing child whereas LATCH-compatible seats
seat in the front seat can result are secured by attaching the seat to 1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
in serious injury or death if the hardware built into the two outer Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
front airbag inflates. seating positions in the back seat. Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
If you must place a forward- Since LATCH-compatible child seats
facing child seat in front, move are easier to install and reduce the 2. The child seat should be of the
the vehicle seat as far back as possibility of improper installation, proper type and size to fit the child.
possible, and properly restrain we recommend selecting this style. Rear-facing for infants, forward-
the child. facing for small children.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page 41 ).
CONTINUED
39
０５／０８／０２１４：３５：４８３１ＳＶＡ６００００４３
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
3. The child seat should fit the Installing a Child Seat movement can be expected and
vehicle seating position (or After selecting a proper child seat should not reduce the child seat’s
positions) where it will be used. and a good place to install the seat, effectiveness.
there are three main steps in
Before purchasing a conventional installing the seat: If the child seat is not secure, try
child seat, or using a previously installing it in a different seating
purchased one, we recommend that 1. Properly secure the child seat to position, or use a different style of
you test the seat in the specific the vehicle. All child seats must be child seat that can be firmly secured.
vehicle seating position or positions secured to the vehicle with the lap
where the seat will be used. part of a lap/shoulder belt or with 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
the LATCH (lower anchors and Make sure the child is properly
tethers for children) system. A strapped in the child seat
child whose seat is not properly according to the child seat maker’s
secured to the vehicle can be instructions. A child who is not
endangered in a crash. properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child The following pages provide
seat, push and pull the seat guidelines on how to properly install
forward and from side-to-side to a child seat. A forward-facing child
verify that it is secure. seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
A child seat secured with a seat belt facing child seats.
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
40
０５／０８／０２１４：３５：５９３１ＳＶＡ６００００４４
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with BUTTONS

LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers

for children) at the outer rear seats.
The lower anchors are located

between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
LOWER ANCHORS Rigid type
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
anchor point. seat: seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
1. Move the seat belt buckle or child seat maker’s instructions.
tongue away from the lower
anchors. Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
2. Make sure there are no objects shown above.
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED
41
０５／０８／０２１４：３６：０８３１ＳＶＡ６００００４５
TETHER STRAP HOOK 6. Attach the tether strap hook to the

tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
7. Push and pull the child seat

forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
Flexible type ANCHOR
Other LATCH-compatible seats 5. Adjust the head restraint to its

have a flexible-type connector as lowest position. Route the tether
shown above. strap over the head restraint,
making sure the strap is not
4. Whatever type you have, follow twisted.
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
42
０５／０８／０２１４：３６：１８３１ＳＶＡ６００００４６
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the

vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in

all seating positions except the
driver’s have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
43
０５／０８／０２１４：３６：２５３１ＳＶＡ６００００４７
To deactivate the locking

mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
44
０５／０８／０２１４：３６：３９３１ＳＶＡ６００００４８
Installing a Child Seat with a Using an Anchor

Tether
Front Front
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

TETHER STRAP
HOOK
TETHER
STRAP
HOOK
ANCHOR ANCHOR
Outer position Center position
ANCHOR COVER
1. After properly securing the child 3. Tighten the strap according to the
A child seat with a tether can be seat (see page 43 ), adjust the seat maker’s instructions.
installed in any seating position in head restraint to its lowest
the back seat, using one of the position, then route the tether
anchorage points shown above. strap over the head restraint.
Since a tether can provide additional 2. Lift the anchor cover, then attach
security to the lap/shoulder belt the tether strap hook to the
installation, we recommend using a anchor, making sure the strap is
tether whenever one is required or not twisted.
available.
45
０５／０８／０２１４：３６：４８３１ＳＶＡ６００００４９
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder or death if the passenger’s front
belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give If a child must ride in front,

instructions on how to check proper move the vehicle seat as far
seat belt fit, what kind of booster back as possible, use a booster
seat to use if one is needed, and seat if needed, and have the
important precautions for a child child sit up properly and wear
who must sit in front. the seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back

against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend

comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
46
０５／０８／０２１４：３７：００３１ＳＶＡ６００００５０
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Some states and Canadian provinces
between the child’s neck and arm? also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be

possible, touching the child’s sure to check current laws in the
thighs? states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip? Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
If you answer yes to all these make sure the booster seat meets
questions, the child is ready to wear federal safety standards (see page
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If 39 ) and that you follow the booster
you answer no to any question, the seat maker’s instructions.
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a If a child who uses a booster seat
back seat and use a booster seat must ride in front, move the vehicle
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them seat as far back as possible, and be
properly without the booster. sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
CONTINUED
47
０５／０８／０２１４：３７：１０３１ＳＶＡ６００００５１
A child may continue using a booster When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And
seat until the tops of their ears are Front while age may be one indicator of
even with the top of the vehicle’s or The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
booster’s seat-back. A child of this Administration and Transport there are other important factors you
height should be tall enough to use Canada recommend that all children should consider.
the lap/shoulder belt without a age 12 and under be properly
booster seat. restrained in the back seat. Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
If the passenger’s front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages 14 and 46 ). If
frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly,
serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a
unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit
sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front.
of position.
Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must
part of a larger child’s body is in the be able to follow the rules, including
path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat
child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride.
injuries.
48
０５／０８／０２１４：３７：２１３１ＳＶＡ６００００５２
If you decide that a child can safely Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a
ride up front, be sure to: Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child’s comfort or
Carefully read the owner’s manual, in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a

and make sure you understand all crash. seat belt can make the belt less
seat belt instructions and all safety effective and increase the chance
information. Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
Move the vehicle seat to the rear- or under the arm. This could
most position. cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
Have the child sit up straight, back chance that the child will slide
against the seat, and feet on or under the belt in a crash and be
near the floor. injured.
Check that the child’s seat belt is Two children should never use the
properly and securely positioned. same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
Supervise the child. Even mature crash.
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
49
０５／０８／０２１４：３７：３２３１ＳＶＡ６００００５３
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the trunk open, airflow can pull
carbon monoxide gas. You should exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
have no problem with carbon Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
monoxide entering the vehicle in Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
normal driving if you maintain your unconsciousness and even kill trunk open, open all the windows and
vehicle properly. you. set the heating and cooling system
as shown below.
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle
carbon monoxide. with the engine running, even in an
The vehicle is raised for an oil unconfined area, adjust the heating
change. and cooling system as follows:
High levels of carbon monoxide can
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the fresh air mode.
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
engine with the garage door closed. 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
The vehicle was in an accident Even with the door open, run the 4. Set the temperature control to a
that may have damaged the engine only long enough to move the comfortable setting.
underside. vehicle out of the garage.
50
０５／０８／０２１４：３７：５４３１ＳＶＡ６００００５４
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations DASHBOARD SUN VISOR

shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models only U.S. models
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
RADIATOR CAP
Canadian models
CONTINUED
51
０５／０８／０２１４：３８：１２３１ＳＶＡ６００００５５
Safety Labels
HOOD DOORJAMBS
U.S. models U.S. models Canadian models
Canadian models
52
０５／０８／０２１４：３８：１７３１ＳＶＡ６００００５６
Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Control Locations ............................ 54 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.. 78
the controls and displays that Instrument Panel ............................. 55 Remote Transmitter ........................ 85
contribute to the daily operation of Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 57 Trunk................................................. 88
your vehicle. All the essential Gauges .............................................. 63 Emergency Trunk Opener ......... 89
controls are within easy reach. Display Change Button ............... 64 Seats .................................................. 90
Odometer ...................................... 64 Power Windows ............................... 96

Trip Meter .................................... 64 Moonroof .......................................... 98
Outside Temperature Mirrors ............................................ 100
Indicator .................................... 65 Parking Brake ................................ 101
Fuel Gauge ................................... 66 Interior Convenience Items .......... 102
Temperature Gauge .................... 66 Beverage Holders ...................... 103
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ........... 66 Console Compartment .............. 103
Maintenance Minder ................... 67 Glove Box ................................... 103
Controls Near the Steering Coat Hook ................................... 104
Wheel ............................................ 68 Accessory Power Sockets......... 104
Windshield Wipers and Washers .. 69 Vanity Mirror ............................. 105
Turn Signal and Headlights............ 70 Sun Visor .................................... 105
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 71 Interior Lights ................................ 106
Hazard Warning Button .................. 72 Ceiling Light ............................... 106
Rear Window Defogger .................. 72 Spotlights .................................... 106
Steering Wheel Adjustments ......... 73 Courtesy Light ........................... 107
Keys and Locks ................................ 74
Immobilizer System......................... 75
Ignition Switch ................................. 76
Door Locks ....................................... 77
Power Door Locks ....................... 78
53
０５／０８／０２１４：３８：２４３１ＳＶＡ６００００５７
Control Locations
MOONROOF SWITCH (P. 98)

INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P. 55)
GAUGES (P. 63)
CLOCK
(P. 173)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P. 100)
POWER DOOR LOCK AUDIO SYSTEM

MASTER SWITCH (P. 115)
(P. 77)
POWER WINDOW HEATING/

SWITCHES COOLING
(P. 96) CONTROLS
(P. 110)
HOOD RELEASE FUEL FILL DOOR/ ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

HANDLE TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE (P. 104)
(P. 182) (P. 181, 88)
A/T model is shown. HAZARD WARNING BUTTON (P. 72)
54
０５／０８／０２１４：３８：３３３１ＳＶＡ６００００５８
Instrument Panel
DX, DX-G (Canada), LX, EX

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 62)

LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
(P. 62)
SIDE AIRBAG LIGHTS ON HIGH BEAM SUPPLEMENTAL
DAYTIME OFF INDICATOR＊ INDICATOR INDICATOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM PARKING BRAKE AND
RUNNING (P. 58) (P. 62) (P. 61) INDICATOR (P. 58) BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR＊
LIGHTS (P. 58)
INDICATOR (P. 61)
CRUISE MAIN ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
INDICATOR (P. 61) SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P. 59)
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR (P. 61) SEAT BELT REMINDER
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR
INDICATOR (P. 59) (P. 57)
LOW OIL PRESSURE TRUNK-OPEN

INDICATOR (P. 57, 263) INDICATOR
(P. 61)
CHARGING SYSTEM DOOR-OPEN
INDICATOR (P. 57, 263) INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P. 60, 209) (P. 61)
LAMP (P. 57, 264)
＊: The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models are noted in the text. CONTINUED
55
０５／０８／０２１４：３８：４２３１ＳＶＡ６００００５９
Instrument Panel
Si
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 62) REV LIMIT INDICATOR (P. 60)
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
(P. 62)
SIDE AIRBAG LIGHTS ON HIGH BEAM SUPPLEMENTAL PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM
DAYTIME OFF INDICATOR＊ INDICATOR INDICATOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR＊ (P. 58)
RUNNING (P. 58) (P. 62) (P. 61) INDICATOR (P. 58)
LIGHTS
INDICATOR (P. 61) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE
CRUISE MAIN SYSTEM INDICATOR
INDICATOR (P. 61) (P. 59)
CRUISE CONTROL SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR (P. 61) INDICATOR
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (P. 57)
(EPS) INDICATOR (P. 60) TRUNK-OPEN
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
INDICATOR (P. 57, 263) (P. 61)
CHARGING SYSTEM DOOR-OPEN
INDICATOR (P. 57, 263) IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 59) INDICATOR
(P. 61)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P. 60, 209)
LAMP (P. 57, 264)
＊: The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models are noted in the text.
56
０５／０８／０２１４：３８：５４３１ＳＶＡ６００００６０
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many If your front passenger does not Charging System
indicators to give you important fasten their seat belt, the indicator Indicator
information about your vehicle. comes on about 6 seconds after the If this indicator comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON engine is running, the battery is not
Seat Belt Reminder (II) position. being charged. For more information,
Indicator see page 263 .

This indicator comes on when you If either of you do not fasten your
turn the ignition switch to the ON seat belt while driving, the beeper Low Oil Pressure
(II) position. It reminds you and your will sound and the indicator will flash Indicator
passengers to fasten your seat belts. again at regular intervals. For more The engine can be severely damaged
A beeper also sounds if you have not information, see page 18 . if this indicator flashes or stays on
fastened your seat belt. when the engine is running. For
more information, see page 263 .
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening Malfunction Indicator
your seat belt, the beeper sounds Lamp
and the indicator flashes. If you do See page 264 .
not fasten your seat belt before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
57
０５／０８／０２１４：３９：０７３１ＳＶＡ６００００６１
U.S. Canada Supplemental Restraint U.S. Canada

System Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
Parking Brake and Brake System you turn the ignition switch to the Side Airbag Off Indicator
Indicator ON (II) position. If it comes on at This indicator comes on when you
This indicator has two functions: any other time, it indicates a turn the ignition switch to the ON
potential problem with your front (II) position. If it comes on at any
1. It comes on when you turn the airbags. This indicator will also alert other time, it indicates that the
ignition switch to the ON (II) you to a potential problem with your passenger’s side airbag has
position. It is a reminder to check side airbags, passenger’s side airbag automatically shut off. For more
the parking brake. A beeper automatic cutoff system, side curtain information, see page 29 .
sounds if you try to drive with the airbags, automatic seat belt
parking brake not fully released. tensioners, driver’s seat position
Driving with the parking brake not sensor, or the front passenger’s
fully released can damage the weight sensors. For more
brakes and tires. information, see page 28 .
2. If it stays on after you have fully

released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 265 .
58
０５／０８／０２１４：３９：１７３１ＳＶＡ６００００６２
Anti-lock Brake System Immobilizer System

(ABS) Indicator Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator comes on briefly when Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
a few seconds when you turn the you turn the ignition switch to the Indicators
ignition switch to the ON (II) ON (II) position. It will then go off if The left or right turn signal indicator
position. If it comes on at any other you have inserted a properly-coded blinks when you signal a lane change

time, there is a problem with the ignition key. If it is not a properly- or turn. If an indicator does not blink
ABS. If this happens, have your coded key, the indicator will blink, or blinks rapidly, it usually means
vehicle checked at a dealer. With and the engine’s fuel system will be one of the turn signal bulbs is
this indicator on, your vehicle still disabled (see page 75 ). burned out (see page 235 ). Replace
has normal braking ability but no the bulb as soon as possible, since
anti-lock function. For more other drivers cannot see that you are
information, see page 204 . signaling.
When you press the hazard warning

button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
59
０５／０８／０２１４：３９：３０３１ＳＶＡ６００００６３
Electric Power Steering If you turn the steering wheel to the Rev Limit Indicator
(EPS) Indicator full left or right repeatedly while
Si model only stopping or driving at very low speed, LEV LIMIT INDICATOR
This indicator normally comes on you may feel slightly harder steering
when you turn the ignition switch to due to overheating of the steering
the ON (II) position and goes off gear box.
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, there is a problem Continuously driving under those
in the electric power steering system. conditions could damage the power
If this happens, stop the vehicle in a steering system.
safe place, and turn off the engine.
Reset the system by restarting the Maintenance Minder Si model only
engine. The indicator will not turn Indicator This indicator shows you when the
off immediately. If it does not go off This indicator reminds you that it is engine speed is near the tachometer’s
after driving a short distance, or time to take your vehicle in for red zone. When the engine speed
comes back on again while driving, scheduled maintenance. The gets to near the red zone, the
take the vehicle to your dealer to maintenance main items and sub indicator blinks. If you exceed the
have it checked. With the indicator items will be displayed in the maximum speed for the gear you are
on, the EPS may be off, making the information display. See page 209 for in, the indicator stays on, and you
vehicle harder to steer. more information on the may feel the engine cut in and out
maintenance minder. due to the engine speed limiter (see
page 197 ).
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the To protect the engine from damage,
required maintenance service. never drive with the tachometer in
its red zone.
60
０５／０８／０２１４：３９：４７３１ＳＶＡ６００００６４
‘‘Daytime Running Cruise Main Indicator Trunk-open Indicator

Lights’’ Indicator
If this indicator comes on when you If equipped This indicator comes on if the trunk
turn the ignition switch to the ON This indicator comes on when you lid is not closed tightly.
(II) position and release the parking turn on the cruise control system by
brake, it means there is a problem pressing the CRUISE button (see Door-open Indicator

with the DRL. There may also be a page 175 ).
problem with the high beam This indicator comes on if either
headlights. Have your vehicle Cruise Control Indicator door is not closed tightly.
checked by your dealer.
If equipped
High Beam Indicator This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
This indicator comes on with the 175 for information on operating the
high beam headlights. For more cruise control.
information, see page 70 .
Washer Level Indicator
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the Canadian models only
daytime running lights (DRL) are on This indicator comes on when the
(see page 71 ). washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
(see page 227 ).
61
０５／０８／０２１４：３９：５８３１ＳＶＡ６００００６５
Lights On Indicator Security System Indicator Low Fuel Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the

exterior lights are on. It comes on SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR LOW FUEL INDICATOR
when the light switch is in either the
or position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will stay on. A reminder
beeper will also sound when you
open the driver’s door.
If equipped This indicator is located in the fuel

This indicator comes on when the gauge. It comes on as a reminder
security system is set. See page that you must refuel soon.
174 for more information on the
security system. When the indicator comes on, there
is about 1.9 US gal (7.5 ) of fuel
remaining in the tank before the
reading reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the reading does reach E.
62
０５／０８／０２１４：４０：０５３１ＳＶＡ６００００６６
Gauges
SEL/RESET BUTTON
SPEEDOMETER
TEMPERATURE GAUGE

FUEL
GAUGE
TACHOMETER
To switch the information display

between the odometer, trip meter,
and outside temperature (if
equipped), and engine oil life and
maintenance service items, press the
INFORMATION SEL/RESET button repeatedly.
DISPLAY
ODOMETER/AVERAGE FUEL TRIP METER

MILEAGE/OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
U.S. model with A/T is shown.
63
０５／０８／０２１４：４０：１６３１ＳＶＡ６００００６７
Gauges
Display Change Button Odometer Trip Meter

This shows the total distance your This meter shows the number of
DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON vehicle has been driven. It measures miles or kilometers driven since you
miles or kilometers. last reset it.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to There are two trip meters: Trip A
disconnect, reset, or alter the and Trip B. Switch between these
odometer with the intent to change displays by pressing the SEL/
the number of miles or kilometers RESET button repeatedly. Each trip
indicated. meter works independently, so you
can keep track of two different
The odometer and the outside distances.
temperature indicator (if equipped)
use the same display. To switch the When you turn the ignition switch to
Press and hold the display change display between them, press the the ON (II) position, what you last
button until you hear a beep. The SEL/RESET button repeatedly. selected is displayed.
speedmeter, trip meter, and When you turn the ignition switch to
odometer readings switch between the ON (II) position, your last To reset a trip meter, display it, and
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers selection is displayed. then press and hold the SEL/RESET
per hour (km/h). button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0.’’
64
０５／０８／０２１４：４０：２５３１ＳＶＡ６００００６８
Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator If the outside temperature is In certain weather conditions,

If equipped incorrectly displayed, you can adjust temperature readings indicate near
This indicator displays the outside it ±5°F in U.S. models (±3°C in freezing (32°F, 0°C) and the display
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S. Canadian models) warmer or cooler. starts blinking. This could mean that
models) or Centigrade (Canadian ice is forming on the road surface.
models). To see the outside NOTE: The temperature must be

temperature, press and release the stabilized before doing this
SEL/RESET button until the procedure.
temperature is shown on the
information display. Select the outside temperature
display, then press the SEL/RESET
The temperature sensor is in the button for 10 seconds. The following
front bumper. Therefore, the sequence will appear for 1 second
temperature reading can be affected each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5, −4, −3, −2,
by heat reflection from the road −1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3, −3, −2,
surface, engine heat, and the −1, 0 (Canada).
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect When it reaches the desired value,
temperature reading when your release the SEL/RESET button. You
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h). should see the new outside
temperature displayed.
The sensor delays the display update
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.
65
０５／０８／０２１４：４０：３５３１ＳＶＡ６００００６９
Gauges
Fuel Gauge Temperature Gauge Check Fuel Cap Indicator

This shows how much fuel you have. This shows the temperature of the If your fuel fill cap is loose or
It may show slightly more or less engine’s coolant. During normal missing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’
than the actual amount. operation, the reading should rise to message appears in the information
about the middle of the gauge. In display after you start the engine.
severe driving conditions, such as The message goes from CHECK to
very hot weather or a long period of FUEL, then to CAP repeatedly. You
Avoid driving with an extremely low uphill driving, the reading may rise will also hear a beep.
f uel level. Running out of f uel could into the upper half of the gauge. If it
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging reaches the red (Hot) mark, pull Turn the engine off, and confirm the
the catalytic converter. safely to the side of the road. See fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
page 261 for instructions and the cap, then retighten it until it
precautions on checking the engine clicks at least once. When you
cooling system. restart the engine, the message
appears again. To clear the message,
press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until it goes away.
66
０５／０８／０２１４：４０：４１３１ＳＶＡ６００００７０
Gauges
If the system still detects a loose or Maintenance Minder

missing fuel fill cap, the malfunction The information display in the
indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. instrument panel shows you the
Turn the engine off, and check or engine oil life and maintenance
retighten the fuel fill cap until it service items when the ignition
clicks at least once. The MIL goes switch is in the ON (II) position. This

out after several days of normal information helps to keep you aware
driving once the cap is tightened or of the periodic maintenance your
replaced. If it does not go out, have vehicle needs for continued trouble-
your dealer inspect the vehicle. For free driving. Refer to page 209 for
more information, see page 264 . more information.
67
０５／０８／０２１４：４０：４９３１ＳＶＡ６００００７１
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
HEADLIGHTS/ TURN SIGNALS WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

(P. 70) (P. 69)
PASSENGER’S AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
(P. 29)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P. 71)
AUDIO SYSTEM＊2
(P. 115)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P. 100)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P. 72)
HEATED MIRRORS＊2
(P. 101)
HORN＊1 HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON (P. 72)
＊2
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS TILT/TELESCOPIC
(P. 170) ADJUSTMENT
(P. 73)
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS＊2 ACCESSORY POWER
EX model without navigation system is shown. (P. 175) SOCKET (P. 104)
＊1 To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
＊2 If equipped.
68
０５／０８／０２１４：４０：５９３１ＳＶＡ６００００７２
Windshield Wipers and Washers
MIST − The wipers run at high Windshield Washer − Pull the

speed until you release the lever. wiper control lever toward you, and
hold it. The washers spray until you
OFF − The wipers are not activated. release the lever. The wipers run at
low speed, then complete one more
INT − The wipers operate every sweep after you release the lever.

few seconds. In low speed and high
speed, the wipers run continuously.
On EX and Si models in U.S., and LX,

EX and Si models in Canada
The length of the wiper interval is
varied automatically according to the
1. MIST vehicle’s speed.
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent Vary the delay by turning the INT
4. LO − Low speed TIME ring. If you turn it to the
5. HI − High speed shortest delay, the wipers change to
6. Windshield washers low speed when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20km/h).
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position. LO − The wipers run at low speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
69
０５／０８／０２１４：４１：０９３１ＳＶＡ６００００７３
Turn Signal and Headlights
Turn Signal − Push down on the High Beams − Push the lever
lever to signal a left turn and up to forward until you hear a click to turn
signal a right turn. To signal a lane on the high beams. The blue high
change, push lightly on the lever, beam indicator will come on (see
and hold it. The lever will return to page 61 ). Pull the lever back to
center when you release it or return to the low beams.
complete a turn.
To flash the high beams, pull the
Headlights On − Turning the lever back lightly, then release it.
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns The high beams will stay on as long
on the parking lights, taillights, as you hold the lever back.
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate lights.
1. Turn signal
2. Off Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
3. Parking and indicator lights position turns on the headlights. If
4. Headlights on you leave the lights on with the key
5. High beams removed from the ignition switch,
6. Flash high beams you will hear a reminder beeper
when you open the driver’s door.
When the light switch is in the

‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder.
70
０５／０８／０２１４：４１：２２３１ＳＶＡ６００００７４
Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness
Daytime Running Lights Instrument Panel Brightness when you reach the maximum or
With the headlight switch off or in minimum brightness. The display
the position, the high beam CONTROL BUTTONS returns to the odometer 5 seconds
headlights and the high beam after you stop adjusting the
indicator come on with reduced brightness.
brightness when you turn the

ignition switch to the ON (II) To reduce glare at night, the
position and release the parking instrument panel illumination dims
brake. They remain on until you turn when you turn the light switch to
the ignition switch off, even if you or .
set the parking brake.
The center of each meter (upper and
The headlights revert to normal lower) illuminates with reduced
operation when you turn them on brightness when you unlock and
with the switch. The buttons under the left side vent open the driver’s door, and then goes
control the brightness of the back to the selected brightness when
instrument panel. Push the ＋ or − you turn the ignition switch to the
button to adjust the brightness. ON (II) position.
Separate adjustments can be made If you insert the key but do not turn
when the headlights are on and off. the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
There are six brightness levels. about 7 seconds.
When you push either button, the
information display indicates the
current level. You will hear a tone
71
０５／０８／０２１４：４１：３２３１ＳＶＡ６００００７５
Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger and antenna wires on

the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side-
to-side.
On Canadian LX, EX and Si models

Pushing this button also turns the
Canadian LX, EX, Si mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page 101 .
Push the button next to the steering The rear window defogger will clear
wheel to turn on the hazard warning fog, frost, and thin ice from the
lights (four-way flashers). This window. Push the defogger button to
causes all four outside turn signals turn it on and off. The indicator in
and both turn indicators in the the button comes on to show the
instrument panel to flash. Use the defogger is on. If you do not turn it
hazard warning lights if you need to off, the defogger will shut itself off
park in a dangerous area near heavy after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled. off when you turn off the ignition
switch. You have to turn the
defogger on again when you restart
the vehicle.
72
０５／０８／０２１４：４１：４１３１ＳＶＡ６００００７６
Steering Wheel Adjustments
Make any steering wheel 3. Push the lever up to lock the

adjustments before you start driving. steering wheel in position.
4. Make sure you have securely

locked the steering wheel in place
Adjusting the steering wheel by trying to move it up, down, in,

position while driving may and out.
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only

when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel so it

points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
73
０５／０８／０２１４：４１：５１３１ＳＶＡ６００００７７
Keys and Locks
U.S. EX and Si models All LX models and Canadian DX-G, EX, The master key fits all the locks on
and Si models your vehicle. The valet key works
MASTER KEY WITH MASTER KEY WITH only in the ignition and the driver’s
REMOTE TRANSMITTER REMOTE TRANSMITTER door lock＊. You can keep the trunk
KEY NUMBER VALET KEY KEY NUMBER VALET KEY and trunk release handle locked
TAG (Gray) TAG (Gray) when you leave your vehicle and the
valet key at a parking facility.
＊On DX model (except Canadian

DX-G), the passenger’s door can
also be locked or unlocked with
the key.
You should have received a key

DX model (except Canadian DX-G) number tag with your keys. You will
MASTER KEYS (Black) need this key number if you ever
KEY NUMBER VALET KEY have to get a lost key replaced. Use
TAG (Gray) only Honda-approved key blanks.
74
０５／０８／０２１４：４２：０４３１ＳＶＡ６００００７８
Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System
These keys contain electronic Immobilizer System If the system repeatedly does not
circuits that are activated by the The immobilizer system protects recognize the coding of your key,
immobilizer system. They will not your vehicle from theft. If an contact your dealer.
work to start the engine if the improperly-coded key (or other
circuits are damaged. device) is used, the engine’s fuel Do not attempt to alter this system
system is disabled. or add other devices to it. Electrical

Protect the keys from direct problems could result that may make
sunlight, high temperature, and When you turn the ignition switch to your vehicle undrivable.
high humidity. the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on If you have lost your key and cannot
Do not drop the keys or set heavy briefly, then go off. If the indicator start your engine, contact your
objects on them. starts to blink, it means the system dealer.
does not recognize the coding of the
Keep the keys away from liquids. key. Turn the ignition switch to the
If they get wet, dry them LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
immediately with a soft cloth. reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
On DX model (except Canadian DX-G)
The keys do not contain batteries. The system may not recognize your
Do not try to take them apart. key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
CONTINUED
75
０５／０８／０２１４：４２：１６３１ＳＶＡ６００００７９
Immobilizer System, Ignition Switch
As required by the FCC: Ignition Switch If the front wheels are turned, the
This device complies with Part 15 of the anti-theft lock may make it difficult
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the to turn the key. Firmly turn the
following two conditions: (1) This device steering wheel to the left or right as
may not cause harmful interference, and you turn the key.
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including ACCESSORY (I) − You can
interference that may cause undesired operate the audio system and the
operation. accessory power socket in this
position.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for ON (II) − This is the normal key
compliance could void the user’s position when driving. Several of the
authority to operate the equipment. indicators on the instrument panel
The ignition switch has four come on as a test when you turn the
This device complies with Industry positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY ignition switch from the
Canada Standard RSS-210. (I), ON (II), and START (III). ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
Operation is subject to the following two position.
conditions: (1) this device may not cause LOCK (0) − You can insert or
interference, and (2) this device must remove the key only in this position. START (III) − Use this position
accept any interference that may cause To turn the key, push it in slightly. If only to start the engine. The switch
undesired operation of the device. your vehicle has an automatic returns to the ON (II) position when
transmission, the shift lever must you let go of the key.
also be in park.
76
０５／０８／０２１４：４２：２６３１ＳＶＡ６００００８０
Ignition Switch, Door Locks
You will hear a reminder beeper if Door Locks On DX model except Canadian DX-G
you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or To lock the passenger’s door when
the ACCESSORY (I) position and LOCK LOCK TAB getting out of the vehicle, pull out
open the driver’s door. Remove the the lock tab and close the door. To
key to turn off the beeper. lock the driver’s door, pull and hold
the outside door handle then pull out

If your vehicle has an automatic the lock tab. Release the handle,
transmission, the shift lever must be then close the door.
in Park before you can remove the
key from the ignition switch. Each door can be locked or unlocked
with the ignition key.
UNLOCK RED MARK

Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving Each door has a lock tab next to the
locks the steering. This can inside door handle. Pull out the tab
cause you to lose control of the to lock the door, and push it in to
vehicle. unlock.
Remove the key from the When the door is unlocked, the red
ignition switch only when mark on the lock tab is shown.
parked.
77
０５／０８／０２１４：４２：３９３１ＳＶＡ６００００８１
Door Locks
Power Door Locks The lock tab on the passenger’s door Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
locks and unlocks only that door. On LX, EX, and Si model in the U.S., and
Pushing in the driver’s door lock tab DX-G, LX, EX, and Si models in Canada
only unlocks the driver’s door. Your vehicle has two custom door
To unlock only the driver’s door lock settings: auto door locking and
from the outside, turn the key and auto driver’s door unlocking. Make
release it. If you turn it again, both all settings before you start driving.
doors unlock.
To lock the passenger’s door when

getting out of the vehicle, pull out
the lock tab and close the door. To
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch and pull
If equipped out the lock tab or push the top of
To lock the doors, push the top of the master switch, then close the
the master door lock switch on door.
either door, pull out the lock tab on
the driver’s door, or use the key in Lockout Prevention
the outside lock on the driver’s door. With the driver’s door open and the
key in the ignition, both master door
Pushing the bottom of either master lock switches are disabled. They are
door lock switch unlocks both doors. not disabled if the driver’s door is
closed. Pushing the top of the switch
on the open passenger’s door will
lock both doors.
78
０５／０８／０２１４：４２：５７３１ＳＶＡ６００００８２
Door Locks
Auto Door Locking To activate either auto door lock 3. Set the parking brake.
The auto door locking feature has mode:
two or three possible settings, Locks both doors when the vehicle’s 4. Push and hold the brake pedal,
depending on the transmission type speed reaches about 9 mph (15 km/h). then move the shift lever out of
(A/T or M/T): Park (P).

The doors lock when the vehicle 5. Push and hold the front of the
speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h). master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a
On vehicles with automatic clicking sound, and after about 5
transmission, the doors lock seconds, you will hear another
whenever you move the shift lever clicking sound.
out of the Park position.
6. Release the switch, move the shift
The auto door locking is lever to Park (P), and turn the
deactivated all the time. ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
This is the default setting when position within 5 seconds.
the vehicle leaves the factory. On vehicles with automatic transmission
On vehicles with manual transmission
1. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park (P), and close the driver’s 1. Close the driver’s door.
door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
(II) position.
CONTINUED
79
０５／０８／０２１４：４３：０８３１ＳＶＡ６００００８３
Door Locks
3. Set the parking brake. Locks both doors when the shift lever is 4. Push and hold the front of the
moved out of Park (P). master door lock switch on the
4. Push and hold the front of the On vehicles with automatic transmission driver’s door. You will hear a
master door lock switch on the only clicking sound, and after about 5
driver’s door. You will hear a seconds, you will hear another
clicking sound, and after about 5 clicking sound.
seconds, you will hear another
clicking sound. 5. Release the switch, and turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
5. Release the switch, and turn the position within 5 seconds.
position within 5 seconds.

Park (P), and close the driver’s
door.

(II) position.
3. Set the parking brake.
80
０５／０８／０２１４：４３：２４３１ＳＶＡ６００００８４
Door Locks
To turn the auto door lock modes 4. Push and hold the front of the Auto Door Unlocking
off: master door lock switch on the The auto door unlocking feature has
driver’s door. You will hear a two or three of these possible
clicking sound, and after about 5 settings, depending on the
seconds, you will hear another transmission type (A/T or M/T):
clicking sound.

The driver’s door unlocks
5. Release the switch, and turn the whenever you turn the ignition
ignition switch to the LOCK (0) switch to the LOCK (0) position.
On vehicles with automatic
transmission, the driver’s door
unlocks when you move the shift
lever to the Park position.
1. Open the driver’s door. The auto door unlocking is

On vehicles with automatic deactivated all the time.
transmission, make sure the shift This is the default setting when
lever is in Park (P). the vehicle leaves the factory.

(II) position.
CONTINUED
81
０５／０８／０２１４：４３：４０３１ＳＶＡ６００００８５
Door Locks
To activate either auto door unlock 3. Set the parking brake. On vehicles with manual transmission
mode: 1. Close the driver’s door.
Unlocks the driver’s door when the 4. Push and hold the brake pedal,
ignition switch is out of the ON (II) then move the shift lever out of 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position. Park (P). (II) position.
5. Push and hold the rear of the 3. Set the parking brake.
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a 4. Push and hold the rear of the
clicking sound, and after about 5 master door lock switch on the
seconds, you will hear another driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound. clicking sound, and after about 5
6. Release the switch, move the shift clicking sound.
lever to Park (P), and turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0) 5. Release the switch, and turn the
position within 5 seconds. ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
On vehicles with automatic transmission
Park (P), and close the driver’s
door.

(II) position.
82
０５／０８／０２１４：４３：５４３１ＳＶＡ６００００８６
Door Locks
Unlocks driver’s door when the shift 4. Push and hold the rear of the To turn the auto door unlock modes
lever is moved to Park (P). master door lock switch on the off:
On vehicles with automatic transmission driver’s door. You will hear a
only clicking sound, and after about 5
clicking sound.

5. Release the switch, and turn the
1. Open the driver’s door.

On vehicles with automatic
1. Make sure the shift lever is in transmission, make sure the shift
Park (P), and close the driver’s lever is in Park (P).
door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.
(II) position.
CONTINUED
83
０５／０８／０２１４：４３：５９３１ＳＶＡ６００００８７
Door Locks
4. Push and hold the rear of the Even though your vehicle’s battery is
master door lock switch on the removed or goes dead, the system
driver’s door. You will hear a keeps the auto door lock/unlock
clicking sound, and after about 5 setting which you selected.
clicking sound.
5. Release the switch, and turn the

84
０５／０８／０２１４：４４：０９３１ＳＶＡ６００００８８
Remote Transmitter
U.S.: LX Canada: DX-G, LX, EX, Si U.S. EX and Si models The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the center position) and
LED LED the spotlights (if the switch is in the
Door position on EX and Si models)
LOCK LOCK will come on when you press the
UNLOCK BUTTON UNLOCK BUTTON
UNLOCK button. If you do not open

BUTTON BUTTON
either door within 30 seconds, the
lights fade out. If you relock the
doors with the remote transmitter
TRUNK before 30 seconds have elapsed, the
PANIC PANIC RELEASE lights goes off immediately.
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
If you do not open either door within
U.S.: LX, EX, Si UNLOCK − Press this button once 30 seconds, the doors automatically
Canada: DX-G, LX, EX, Si to unlock the driver’s door. Push it relock, and the security system sets
LOCK − Press this button once to twice to unlock the passenger’s door. (on U.S. LX, EX, and Si models). You
lock both doors. Some exterior lights Some exterior lights will flash twice cannot unlock it if the key is in the
will flash once. When you push each time you push the button. ignition switch.
LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you
will hear a beep to verify that the
doors are locked and that the
security system has set (on U.S. LX,
EX and Si models). You cannot lock
the doors if either door is not fully
closed or the key is in the ignition
switch. CONTINUED
85
０５／０８／０２１４：４４：２２３１ＳＶＡ６００００８９
Remote Transmitter
On U.S. EX and Si models Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter

TRUNK RELEASE − Press this Avoid dropping or throwing the Battery
button for about 1 second to open transmitter.
the trunk. You cannot open the trunk
if the key is in the ignition switch. Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
PANIC − Press this button for
about 2 seconds to attract attention: Do not immerse the transmitter in
the horn will sound, and the exterior any liquid.
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any If you lose a transmitter, the
other button on the remote replacement needs to be SCREW
transmitter, or turn the ignition reprogrammed by your dealer.
switch to the ON (II) position. U.S. EX and Si models are shown.
If it takes several pushes on the

button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR1616
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of

the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
86
０５／０８／０２１４：４４：３３３１ＳＶＡ６００００９０
Remote Transmitter
2. Separate the transmitter by prying 4. Remove the old battery from the As required by the FCC:
its middle seam with your back of the inner cover, and insert This device complies with Part 15 of the
fingernail. a new battery into the back of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
cover with the ＋ side facing down. following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
5. Install the parts in reverse order. (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
BATTERY operation.

approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
TAB authority to operate the equipment.
U.S. EX and Si models are shown.
This device complies with Industry
3. Inside the transmitter, separate Canada Standard RSS-210.
the inner cover from the keypad Operation is subject to the following two
by releasing the two tabs on the conditions: (1) this device may not cause
cover. interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
87
０５／０８／０２１４：４４：４３３１ＳＶＡ６００００９１
Trunk
On U.S. EX and Si models Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
Press and hold the trunk release while driving to avoid damaging the
Pull button on the remote transmitter. lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See Carbon
All models except U.S. EX and Si Monoxide Hazard on page 50 .
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
You can open the trunk in two ways:

MASTER KEY
Pull the trunk release handle to
the left of the driver’s seat. To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
On all models except U.S. EX and Si
Use the master key to open the
trunk lock. The valet key does not
work in this lock.
88
０５／０８／０２１４：４４：５３３１ＳＶＡ６００００９２
Trunk
Emergency Trunk Opener

MASTER KEY
To protect items in the trunk when

you need to give the key to someone As a safety feature, your vehicle has
else: a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
1. Lock the trunk release handle inside. To open the trunk, push the
with the master key. release lever to the left.
2. Give the person the valet key. Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature. For more information
about child safety, see page 35 .
89
０５／０８／０２１４：４５：０１３１ＳＶＡ６００００９３
Seats
Front Seat Adjustments

See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
Make all seat adjustments before

you start driving.
To adjust the seat forward or To change the seat-back angle, pull

backward, pull up on the bar under up on the lever on the outside of the
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move seat bottom.
the seat to the desired position, and
release the bar. Try to move the seat Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
to make sure it is locked in position. rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
90
０５／０８／０２１４：４５：１０３１ＳＶＡ６００００９４
Seats
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Armrest

The height of your driver’s seat is To use the console lid as an armrest,
adjustable. To raise the seat bottom, slide it to one of its three positions.
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower Make sure your passenger’s hands
the seat, push the lever down or fingers are away from the armrest
repeatedly. before moving it.
Make all seat adjustments before

you start driving.
91
０５／０８／０２１４：４５：１９３１ＳＶＡ６００００９５
Seats
Rear Seat Access All models except DX and Canadian

Passenger’s Side DX-G
After a passenger gets into the back
RELEASE LEVER seat, push the seat-back to the
upright position, and push the seat
backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
On DX and Canadian DX-G models

When you return the seat-back
upright, the seat stays in the fully
SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVER forward position. Use the seat
adjustment bar and the seat-back
Driver’s Side adjustment lever to move the seat to
To get into the rear seat on the To get into the rear seat on the the desired position. Make sure the
driver’s side, open the door and pull passenger’s side, push downward on seat is fully latched before sitting in
up on the seat-back adjustment lever. the release lever at the base of the it.
The seat-back will tilt forward to seat-back or pull up on the seat-back
allow easier entry to the rear seat. adjustment lever. The seat-back will
tilt forward, and the seat will move
forward to allow easier entry to the
rear seat.
92
０５／０８／０２１４：４５：２９３１ＳＶＡ６００００９６
Seats
Head Restraints FRONT Rear Center Position

See page 13 for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
Your vehicle is equipped with head

restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
RELEASE
They are most effective when you BUTTON RELEASE BUTTON
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the The head restraints adjust for height. When carrying a passenger in the
center of the restraint. You need both hands to adjust a rear center seating position, make
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it sure the rear center head restraint is
while driving. To raise it, pull upward. adjusted to its highest position.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
93
０５／０８／０２１４：４５：４０３１ＳＶＡ６００００９７
Seats
Folding Rear Seat
GUIDE RELEASE
The back of the rear seat folds down When storing cargo, you can move To release the seat-back, pull the
to give you direct access to the trunk. the rear center shoulder belt out of release under the trunk panel. Push
The seat-back can be released from the way by removing the belt from the seat-back down, then let go of
inside the trunk. the guide. the release.
On all models except DX and U.S. LX Remove any items from the seat For 60/40 split rear fold-down seat
The left and right halves can be before you fold down the seat-back. models, a release is located on each
folded separately. side of the trunk.
For full rear fold-down seat models,

the release is located on the driver’s
side of the trunk.
94
０５／０８／０２１４：４５：４８３１ＳＶＡ６００００９８
Seats
Make sure that the folded-down rear Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
seat does not interfere with the front positioned in front of the rear seat-
passenger’s seat-back. This will back whenever it is in the upright
cause the front passenger’s weight position.
sensors to work improperly (see
page 25 ). This may also cause the Do not put any heavy items on the

seat belt reminder indicator for a seat-back when it is folded.
front passenger to work improperly.
Also, check the passenger airbag off Make sure all items in the trunk, or
indicator to assure the proper items extending through the opening
operation of the passenger’s into the back seat, are secured.
advanced front airbag. Loose items can fly forward and
cause injury if you have to brake
To lock the seat-back upright, push it hard. See Carrying Cargo on page
firmly against the trunk panel. Make 188 .
sure it is latched in place by pulling
on the top of the seat. Never drive with the seat-back
folded down and the trunk lid open.
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 50 .
95
０５／０８／０２１４：４５：５８３１ＳＶＡ６００００９９
Power Windows
DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH cancels this function. AUTO − To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down, then release it.
The window automatically goes
Closing a power window on down all the way. To stop the
someone’s hands or fingers can window from going all the way down,
cause serious injury. pull back on the window switch
briefly.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before To close the driver’s window fully,
closing them. pull back the window switch firmly,
MAIN SWITCH then release it. The window
automatically goes all the way up. To
If equipped The driver’s armrest has a master stop the window from going all the
Turn the ignition switch to the ON power window control panel. To way up, push down on the window
(II) position to raise or lower either open the passenger’s window, push switch briefly.
window. To open the window, push down on the switch and hold it down
the switch down and hold it. Release until the window reaches the desired To open or close the driver’s window
the switch when you want the position. To close the window, pull partially, push down or pull back on
window to stop. Pull back on the back on the window switch. Release the window switch lightly and hold it.
switch and hold it to close the the switch when the window gets to The window will stop when you
window. the position you want. release the switch.
The windows operate for up to 10

minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either door
96
０５／０８／０２１４：４６：０７３１ＳＶＡ６０００１００
Power Windows
When you push the MAIN switch in, If your vehicle’s battery is
the switch is OFF, and the disconnected or goes dead, or the
passenger’s window cannot be raised driver’s window fuse is removed, the
or lowered. To cancel this feature, AUTO function could be disabled. If
push on the switch again to get it to the power window system needs to
pop out. Keep the MAIN switch off be reset after reconnecting the

when you have children in the battery or installing the fuse, do this:
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the window 1. Start the engine. Push down and
unintentionally. hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s
window runs into any obstacle while 2. Pull and hold the driver’s window
it is closing automatically, it will switch to close the window
reverse direction, and then stop. To completely, then hold the switch
close the window, remove the for about 2 seconds.
obstacle, then use the window switch
again. If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
Auto reverse stops sensing when the vehicle checked by your dealer.
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
97
０５／０８／０２１４：４６：１７３１ＳＶＡ６０００１０１
Moonroof
To tilt up the back of the moonroof, AUTO − To open the moonroof

MOONROOF SWITCH push on the center of the moonroof fully, pull back the moonroof switch
switch. To stop the moonroof to tilt firmly, then release it. The moonroof
up fully, push the switch briefly. automatically opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening,
To open the moonroof, pull back on push the switch briefly.
the switch and hold it. Release the
switch when the moonroof reaches To close the moonroof fully, firmly
the desired position. To close the push the moonroof switch forward,
moonroof, push the switch forward then release it. The moonroof
and hold it. Release the switch to automatically closes all the way. To
stop the operation. stop the moonroof from closing,
push the switch briefly.
If equipped
The moonroof can be tilted up in the To open or close the moonroof
back for ventilation, or it can be slid Opening or closing the partially, lightly pull the switch back
back into the roof. Use the switch on moonroof on someone’s hands or push it forward and hold it. The
the front ceiling to operate the or fingers can cause serious moonroof will stop when you release
moonroof. You must turn the injury. the switch.
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position to operate the moonroof. Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
98
０５／０８／０２１４：４６：２３３１ＳＶＡ６０００１０２
Moonroof
AUTO REVERSE − If the The moonroof has a key-off delay.

moonroof runs into any obstacle You can open and close the
while it is closing automatically, it moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
will reverse direction and then stop. you turn off the ignition switch. The
To close the moonroof, remove the key-off delay cancels as soon as you
obstacle, then use the moonroof open either door.

switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the

moonroof is almost closed. You If you try to open the moonroof in
should always check that all below-f reezing temperatures, or when
passengers and objects are away it is covered with snow or ice, you can
from the moonroof before closing it. damage the moonroof panel or motor.
99
０５／０８／０２１４：４６：３５３１ＳＶＡ６０００１０３
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. Push the appropriate edge of the

adjustment switch to move the
TAB SELECTOR SWITCH mirror right, left, up, or down.
4. When you finish, move the

selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility. If equipped
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
you start driving. (II) position.
The inside mirror has day and night 2. Move the selector switch to L
positions. The night position reduces (driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
glare from headlights behind you. side).
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
100
０５／０８／０２１４：４６：４３３１ＳＶＡ６０００１０４
Mirrors, Parking Brake
Power Mirror Heaters Parking Brake
Driving the vehicle with the parking

brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking

brake on.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/

HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON PARKING BRAKE LEVER
On Canadian LX, EX and Si models To apply the parking brake, pull the
The outside mirrors are heated to lever up fully. To release it, pull up
remove fog and frost. With the slightly, push the button, and lower
ignition switch in the ON (II) the lever. The parking brake
position, turn on the heaters by indicator on the instrument panel
pressing the rear window defogger should go out when the parking
button. The indicator in the button brake is fully released (see page 58 ).
comes on as a reminder. Press the
button again to turn the heaters and
the defogger off.
101
０５／０８／０２１４：４６：４８３１ＳＶＡ６０００１０５
Interior Convenience Items
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT＊ VANITY MIRROR

SIDE POCKET
SUN VISOR
COAT HOOK
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
GLOVE BOX
CENTER POCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET＊ MAP POCKET
＊:If equipped
102
０５／０８／０２１４：４７：０１３１ＳＶＡ６０００１０６
Beverage Holders Console Compartment Glove Box

Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can
damage the upholstery, carpeting,

and electrical components in the
interior.
LEVER
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
If equipped Open the glove box by pulling the

To open the console compartment, handle to the left. Close it with a firm
pull up on the lever, and lift the lid. push.
To close, lower the lid, and push it

down until it latches.
Open the front beverage holder by

sliding the lid.
CONTINUED
103
０５／０８／０２１４：４７：１２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１０７
Coat Hook Accessory Power Sockets
An open glove box can cause

serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box

closed while driving.
COAT HOOK
To use a coat hook, pull it down. To use an accessory power socket,

Close it with a firm push. pull up the cover.
Make sure the coat hook is closed This socket is intended to supply
when you are not using it. This hook power for 12 volt DC accessories
is not designed for large or heavy that are rated 120 watts or less (10
items. amps).
To use an accessory power socket,

the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
104
０５／０８／０２１４：４７：２３３１ＳＶＡ６０００１０８
Vanity Mirror Sun Visor

SUN VISOR
EX and Si
On EX and Si models To use a vanity mirror on the back of To use the sun visor, pull it down.
Another accessory power socket is in the sun visor, pull up the cover. When using the sun visor for the
the center console compartment. side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter Make sure you put the sun visor
element. When more than one back in place when you are getting
socket is being used, the combined into or out of the vehicle.
power rating of the accessories
should be 120 watts or less
(10 amps).
105
０５／０８／０２１４：４７：３３３１ＳＶＡ６０００１０９
Interior Lights
Ceiling Light After both doors are closed tightly, Spotlights

the light dims slightly, then fades out
DOOR ACTIVATED in about 30 seconds.
ON The ceiling light (with the switch in

the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
OFF switch. If you do not open a door, the
light stays on, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.
If you leave either door open without

the key in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light goes off after 3 minutes.
The ceiling light has a three-position On LX model
switch; ON, Door Activated, and Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
OFF. In the Door Activated (center) lens. Push the lens again to turn it
position, the light comes on when off. You can use the spotlights at all
you: times.
Open either door.
Unlock the doors with the key or

the remote transmitter.
106
０５／０８／０２１４：４７：４２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１１０
Interior Lights
On EX and Si models Courtesy Light

The spotlights have a two-position On EX and Si models
switch. In the DOOR position, the The courtesy light between the
lights come on when you open either spotlights comes on when you turn
door. In the OFF position, the lights the parking lights on. To adjust its
do not come on. brightness, push the instrument

panel brightness control buttons
COURTESY LIGHT under the driver’s side vent.
OFF POSITION
DOOR ACTIVATED SPOTLIGHT
The spotlights (with the switch in

the DOOR position) also come on
when you unlock the door with the
key or the remote transmitter, and
when you remove the key from the
ignition switch.
107
０５／０８／０２１４：４７：４４３１ＳＶＡ６０００１１１
Main Menu
108
０５／０８／０２１８：２６：０３３１ＳＶＡ６０００１１２
Main Menu
Features
The heating and air conditioning＊ Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 110 Security System ............................. 174
systems in your vehicle provide a Audio System ................................. 115 Cruise Control ................................ 175
comfortable driving environment in Audio System (Models without
all weather conditions. navigation system) ................ 116
＊
Air conditioning is optional on DX Playing the AM/FM Radio....... 117
model. Playing the XM Satellite
Radio (Optional) .................... 121
The standard audio system has Playing a Disc ............................. 126
Features
many features. This section Disc Player Error Messages .... 132
describes those features and how to Optional Disc Changer Error
use them. (If you have an optional Messages ................................ 133
audio system, refer to the operating Audio System (Models with
instructions that came with it.) navigation system) ................ 134
Voice Control System................ 134
All models except U.S. DX Playing the AM/FM Radio....... 134
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio Playing the XM Satellite
system that requires a code number Radio ....................................... 138
to enable it. Playing a Disc ............................. 146
Disc Player Error Messages .... 154
U.S. LX, EX, and Si models Playing a PC Card ...................... 155
The security system helps to AM/FM Radio Reception ............. 167
discourage vandalism and theft of Protecting Your Discs ................... 169
your vehicle. Remote Audio Controls................. 170
Navigation systems are available on Playing an Optional Audio Unit.... 171
U.S. EX and Si models only. Radio Theft Protection.................. 172
Setting the Clock ........................... 173
109
０５／０８／０２１４：４７：５８３１ＳＶＡ６０００１１３
Vents, Heating, and A/C
MODE BUTTONS
FAN CONTROL DIAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL

DIAL
MAX A/C BUTTON＊ REAR WINDOW

＊
DEFOGGER BUTTON/
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON HEATED MIRRORS＊
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
＊ If equipped
110
０５／０８／０２１４：４８：２０３１ＳＶＡ６０００１１４
Fan Control Dial Recirculation Button Rear Window Defogger Button

Turn this dial to increase or decrease When the recirculation indicator is This button turns the rear window
the fan speed and airflow. on, air from the vehicle’s interior is defogger off and on (see page 72 ).
sent throughout the system again.
Temperature Control Dial When the indicator is off, air is On some models, this button also
Turning this dial clockwise increases brought in from the outside of the operates the heated outside mirrors
the temperature of the airflow. vehicle (fresh air mode). (see page 101 ).
Features
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button The outside air intakes for the Mode Control
If equipped heating and cooling system are at Use the mode control buttons to
This button turns the air the base of the windshield. Keep this select the vents air flows from. Some
conditioning on and off. The area clear of leaves and other debris. air will flow from the dashboard
indicator in the button is on when corner vents in all modes.
the A/C is on. The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions. Air flows from the center
MAX A/C Button Keeping the system in recirculation and corner vents in the dashboard.
If equipped mode, particularly with the A/C off,
The system automatically can cause the windows to fog up. Airflow is divided between
turns on the A/C and switches to the vents in the dashboard and the
recirculation mode. Air flows from Switch to recirculation mode when floor vents.
the center and side vents in the driving through dusty or smoky
dashboard. Pressing the or A/C conditions, then return to fresh air
button cancels MAX A/C. mode.
CONTINUED
111
０５／０８／０２１４：４８：４１３１ＳＶＡ６０００１１５
Air flows from the floor Air flows from the defroster Using the Heater
vents. vents at the base of the windshield. The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
When you select , the system When you select or , will be several minutes before you
automatically switches to fresh air the system automatically switches to feel warm air coming from the
mode. If you switch the mode from fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. system.
or to , the system You cannot turn the A/C off in this
keeps the A/C on. The A/C mode. 1. Select .
indicator will not come on if it was When you select , the system
off to start with. Ventilation automatically switches to fresh air
The flow-through ventilation system mode. If you switch the mode
To turn off the A/C, press the A/C draws in outside air, circulates it from or , the system
button to illuminate the indicator, through the interior, then exhausts it also automatically turns on the
then press it again to turn off the through vents near the rear window. A/C. This helps prevent the
A/C. windows from fogging up
1. Set the temperature to the lower unintendedly. The A/C indicator
When you switch to another mode limit. will not come on if it was off to
from , the A/C turns off. But if 2. Make sure the A/C is off. start with (see the first column on
it was on to start with, the A/C stays 3. Select and fresh air mode. this page).
on. 4. Set the fan to the desired speed. 2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with
Airflow is divided between the temperature control dial.
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
112
０５／０８／０２１４：４８：５５３１ＳＶＡ６０００１１６
Using the A/C If the interior is very warm, you can Dehumidify the Interior
Air conditioning places an extra load cool it down more rapidly by partially Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
on the engine. Watch the engine opening the windows, turning on the moisture from the air. When used in
coolant temperature gauge (see page A/C, and setting the fan to combination with the heater, it
66 ). If it moves near the red zone, maximum speed in fresh air mode. makes the interior warm and dry and
turn off the A/C until the gauge can prevent the windows from
reading returns to normal. To cool the interior with MAX A/C: fogging up.
1. Set the fan to the desired speed.
Features
1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the 2. Select MAX A/C mode. 1. Turn the fan on.
button. The indicator in the button The system automatically turns on 2. Turn on the air conditioning.
comes on when a fan speed is the A/C, selects , and 3. Select and fresh air mode.
selected. switches to recirculation mode. 4. Adjust the temperature to your
2. Make sure the temperature is set 3. Make sure the temperature is set preference.
to maximum cool. to maximum cool.
3. Select . This setting is suitable for all driving
4. If the outside air is humid, select conditions whenever the outside
recirculation mode. If the outside temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
113
０５／０８／０２１４：４９：１０３１ＳＶＡ６０００１１７
To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice To Turn Everything Off
To remove fog from the inside of the From the Windows Turning the fan speed control dial all
windows: 1. Select . The system the way to the left shuts the system
1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or automatically switches to fresh air off.
high for faster defrosting. mode and turns on the A/C.
2. Select . The system The A/C indicator does not come Keep the system off for short
automatically switches to fresh air on if it was off to start with. periods only.
mode and turns on the A/C. The 2. Select .
A/C indicator will not come on if it 3. Set the fan and temperature To keep stale air and mustiness
was off to start with. controls to maximum level. from collecting, you should have
3. Adjust the temperature so the the fan running at all times.
airflow feels warm. To clear the windows faster, you can
4. Select to help clear the close the dashboard corner vents by
rear window. rotating the wheel next to each vent.
5. To increase airflow to the This sends more warm air to the
windshield, close the corner vents. windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
When you switch to , from mode to avoid fogging the windows.
or , the A/C stays on.
This helps prevent the windows from For your safety, make sure you have
rapidly fogging up when the air is a clear view through all the windows
suddenly routed away from the before driving.
windshield. If you want to turn the
A/C off, press and release the A/C
button twice. The indicator in the
button comes on and then goes off.
114
０５／０８／０２１４：４９：１８３１ＳＶＡ６０００１１８
Audio System
An audio system is standard on all U.S. EX and Si models

U.S. LX model
models except the U.S. DX. Read the All Canadian models without navigation system
appropriate pages (as shown below)
to use your vehicle’s audio system.
For U.S. LX, non-navi EX and Si, and

all Canadian models, see pages
116 through 136 .
Features
For U.S. EX and Si models with
navigation system, see pages
137 through 168 .
U.S. EX and Si models

with navigation system
115
０５／０８／０２１４：４９：３２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１１９
Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Your audio system shows a welcome

message on the display when you
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. You can see a message
‘‘WELCOME’’ on the display when
your vehicle was new.
You can also customize this welcome

message to your liking with the POWER/VOLUME TUNE KNOB
audio controls. KNOB
To Customize a Message SEEK BUTTON

You can set up to about 16 EX model is shown.
characters on the display.
3. Turn the TUNE knob to change a To change the letter, select the
To select a character: letter. previous segment by pushing the
bottom of the SEEK button.
1. Make sure the audio system is off. 4. Push the top of the SEEK button
to select the next segment, then The system will return to the audio
2. Push and hold the TUNE knob, turn the TUNE knob to select a display about 5 seconds after you
then push the power/volume knob letter. Repeat this procedure to set stop selecting a letter.
on the audio control panel. You your message.
will see the first letter blinking.
116
０５／０８／０２１４：４９：３９３１ＳＶＡ６０００１２０
Playing the AM/FM Radio
U.S. LX and all Canadian models U.S. EX and Si models
SCAN AM FM AUTO SELECT AM/FM BUTTON AUTO SELECT BUTTON

BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
Features
POWER/VOLUME PRESET SEEK TUNE KNOB POWER/VOLUME PRESET SEEK TUNE KNOB
KNOB BUTTONS BUTTON KNOB BUTTONS BUTTON
117
０５／０８／０２１４：４９：４７３１ＳＶＡ６０００１２１
To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station SCAN − The scan function samples
The ignition switch must be in the You can use any of five methods to all stations with strong signals on the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. find radio stations on the selected selected band. To activate it, press
Turn the system on by pushing the band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the the SCAN button, then release it.
power/volume knob or the AM or preset buttons, and AUTO SELECT . You will see SCAN in the display.
FM button (the AM/FM button on The system will scan for a station
models with XM radio available). TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to with a strong signal. When it finds
Adjust the volume by turning the tune the radio to a desired frequency. one, it will stop and play that station
power/volume knob. Turn the knob to the right to tune a for about 10 seconds.
higher frequency, and turn it to the
The band and frequency that the left to tune a lower frequency. If you do nothing, the system will
radio was last turned to are displayed. then scan for the next strong station
To change bands, press the AM or SEEK − The SEEK function and play it for 10 seconds. When it
FM button (AM/FM button on searches up and down from the plays a station you want to listen to,
models that are XM radio capable). current frequency to find a station press the SCAN button again.
On the FM band, ST will be with a strong signal. To activate it,
displayed if the station is press the or side of the
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo SEEK button, then release it.
reproduction in AM is not available.
118
０５／０８／０２１４：５０：００３１ＳＶＡ６０００１２２
Preset − Each side of the buttons AUTO SELECT − If you are If you do not like the stations auto
(1 through 6) can store one traveling far from home and can no select has stored, you can store
frequency on AM, and two longer receive your preset stations, other frequencies on the preset
frequencies on FM. you can use the auto select feature to buttons as previously described.
find stations in the local area.
1. Select the desired band, AM or To turn off auto select, press the
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store Press the A. SEL button. You will see A. SEL button. This restores the
two frequencies with each side of A. SEL flashing in the display, and presets you originally set.
Features
the preset button. the system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the For information on AM/FM radio
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan frequencies of six AM, and twelve frequencies and reception, see page
function to tune the radio to a FM stations in the preset buttons. 167 .
desired station.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
3. Pick a preset number (1−6), and pressing a preset button if auto
hold it until you hear a beep. select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
119
０５／０８／０２１４：５０：１７３１ＳＶＡ６０００１２３
Adjusting the Sound SVC − Adjusts the volume level choose low. If you feel the sound is
Press the TUNE (SOUND) knob based on the vehicle speed. too quiet, choose high.
repeatedly to display the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, Each mode is shown in the display as This function is set to MID as the
SUBWOOFER (if equipped), and it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to default setting when the vehicle
SVC (speed-sensitive volume adjust the setting to your liking. leaves the factory.
compensation) settings. When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display. Audio System Lighting
BASS − Adjusts the bass. You can use the instrument panel
The system will return to the audio brightness control buttons to adjust
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble. display about 5 seconds after you the illumination of the audio system
stop adjusting a mode. (see page 71 ). The audio system
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back illuminates when the parking lights
strength of the sound. Speed-sensitive Volume are on, even if the radio is off.
Compensation (SVC)
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-to- The SVC mode controls the volume
side strength of the sound. based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
If equipped becomes. As you slow down, the
SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the audio volume decreases.
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker. The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
120
０５／０８／０２１４：５０：２４３１ＳＶＡ６０００１２４
Playing the XM Satellite Radio

Optional on U.S. EX and Si models
Your audio system is capable of POWER/VOLUME KNOB DISPLAY BUTTON
receiving XM Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States, SCAN BUTTON XM RADIO BUTTON
except Hawaii and Alaska.
XM is a registered trademark of
Features
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
XM radio receives signals from two

satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
PRESET BUTTONS TUNE KNOB
121
０５／０８／０２１４：５０：３３３１ＳＶＡ６０００１２５
Operating the XM Radio MODE − To switch between You may experience periods when
To listen to XM radio, turn the channel mode and category mode, XM Radio does not transmit the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY press and hold the DISP/MODE artist’s name and song title
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the button until the mode changes. information. If this happens, there is
power/volume knob to turn on the In channel mode, you can select all nothing wrong with your system.
audio system, and press the ‘‘XM’’ of the available channels. In category
button. Adjust the volume by turning mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, TUNE − Turn the TUNE knob to
the knob. The last channel you etc., you can select all of the change channel selections. Turn the
listened to will show in the display. channels within that category. knob right for higher numbered
Each time you press and release the channels and left for lower
DISP/MODE button, the display numbered channels. In the category
changes in the following sequence: mode, you can only select channels
Channel name, channel number, within that category.
category, artist name, and music title.
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) −
Press either side of the CATEGORY
button ( or ) to select
another category.
122
０５／０８／０２１４：５０：４８３１ＳＶＡ６０００１２６
SCAN − The scan function gives 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan XM Radio Display Messages
you a sampling of all channels while function to tune to a desired
in the channel mode. In the category channel. ‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
mode, only the channels within that audio or program information.
category are scanned. To activate In category mode, only channels
scan, press the SCAN button. The within that category can be selected. ‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
system plays each channel in In channel mode, all channels can be currently selected is no longer
numerical order for a few seconds, selected. broadcasting.
Features
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to 3. Pick a preset number you want for ‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
continue listening to, press the that channel. Press and hold the code is being updated. Wait until the
button again. button until you hear a beep. encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
Preset − You can store up to 12 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the normally.
preset channels using each side of first six channels.
the preset button. Each side of the ‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
button stores one channel from the 5. Press the XM button again. Store currently too weak. Move the vehicle
XM1 band and one channel from the the next six channels using steps 2 to an area away from tall buildings,
XM2 band. and 3. and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
To store a channel: Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper side of the preset
1. Press the XM button. Either XM1 button to tune to it.
or XM2 will show in the display.
CONTINUED
123
０５／０８／０２１４：５０：５６３１ＳＶＡ６０００１２７
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel

number does not exist or is not part Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in
of your subscription, or this channel mountains or large obstacles to these areas.
the south.
has no artist or title information at
this time.
‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem

with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
The XM satellites are in orbit over Satellite signals are more likely to be
the equator; therefore, objects south blocked by tall buildings and
of the vehicle may cause satellite mountains the farther north you
reception interruptions. To help travel from the equator. Carrying
compensate for this, ground-based large items on a roof rack can also
repeaters are placed in major block the signal.
metropolitan areas.
124
０５／０８／０２１４：５１：１０３１ＳＶＡ６０００１２８
Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly Your I.D. will appear in the display.
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for
these conditions: compliance could void the user’s After you’ve registered with XM
authority to operate the equipment. Radio, keep your audio system in the
Driving on the north side of an satellite radio mode while you wait
east/west mountain road. Receiving Satellite Radio Service for activation. This should take about
Driving on the north side of a If your XM Radio service has expired 30 minutes.
Features
large commercial truck on an or you purchased your vehicle from
east/west road. a previous owner, you can listen to a While waiting for activation, make
Driving in tunnels. sampling of the broadcasts available sure your vehicle remains in an open
Driving on a road beside a vertical on XM Satellite Radio. With the area with good reception. Once your
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south ignition switch in the ACCESSORY audio system is activated, you’ll be
of you. (I) or ON (II) position, push the able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
Driving on the lower level of a power/volume knob to turn on the XM Radio will continue to send an
multi-tiered road. audio system and press the XM activation signal to your vehicle for
Driving on a single lane road RADIO button. A variety of music at least 12 hours from the activation
alongside dense trees taller than types and styles will play. request. If the service has not been
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Large items carried on a roof rack. If you decide to purchase XM Radio.
satellite radio service, contact XM
There may be other geographic Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
situations that could affect XM radio 1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
reception. them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
125
０５／０８／０２１４：５１：１８３１ＳＶＡ６０００１２９
Playing a Disc
U.S. LX model U.S. EX and Si models

All Canadian models
EJECT BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON CD BUTTON EJECT LOAD INDICATOR CD BUTTON
BUTTON REPEAT RANDOM DISPLAY
LOAD INDICATOR RANDOM DISPLAY
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
SCAN SCAN
BUTTON BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BUTTON SEEK/SKIP BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB TUNE KNOB POWER/VOLUME KNOB TUNE KNOB
126
０５／０８／０２１４：５１：３５３１ＳＶＡ６０００１３０
To Play a Disc NOTE: The specifications of the compatible

To load or play discs, the ignition If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is WMA file are:
switch must be in the ACCESSORY protected by digital rights −Bit rate:
(I) or ON (II) position. management (DRM), the audio unit 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
displays FORMAT, and then skips to −Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48
You operate the disc player with the the next file. kHz
same controls used for the radio. To −Compatible with variable bit rate
select the disc player, press the CD/ Video CDs and DVD discs do not and multi-session
Features
AUX button (the CD button on work in this unit. −Maximum layers
models with XM radio available). (including ROOT): 8 layers
You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the display. The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are: To Load a Disc
−Sampling frequency: Insert a disc about halfway into the
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) in the rest of the way to play it. You
The label can curl up and cause the −Bit rate: operate the disc player with the
disc to jam in the unit. 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ same controls used for the radio.
160/192/224/256/320 kbps The number of the current track and
This audio system can also play (MPEG1) the elapsed time are shown in the
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ display. When playing a disc in MP3
MP3 or WMA formats. When 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) or WMA, the numbers of the current
playing a disc in MP3, you will see −Compatible with variable bit rate folder and file, and the elapsed time
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA and multi-session are shown. The system will
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the −Maximum layers continuously play a disc until you
display. You can select up to 255 (including ROOT): 8 layers change modes.
folders or tracks. CONTINUED
127
０５／０８／０２１４：５１：４９３１ＳＶＡ６０００１３１
You cannot load and play 3-inch the display. Press and hold the DISP To Change or Select Tracks/Files
(8-cm) discs in this system. button until the next 16 characters Use the SEEK/SKIP button while a
are shown. disc is playing to select passages and
Text Data Display Function change tracks (files in MP3/WMA
Each time you press the DISP button, You will also see some text data mode).
the display shows you the text data under these conditions:
on a disc, if the disc was recorded SEEK/SKIP − Each time you
with text data. When a new folder, file, or track is press and release the side of
selected. the SEEK/SKIP button, the player
You can see the album, artist, and skips forward to the beginning of the
track name in the display. If a disc is When you change the audio mode next track (file in MP3 or WMA
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can to play a disc with text data or in mode). Press and release the
see the folder and file name, and the MP3 or WMA. side to skip backward to the
album, artist, and track tag. beginning of the current track. Press
When you insert a disc, and the it again to skip to the beginning of
With the folder name, you will see system begins to play. the previous track.
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with When playing a CD-DA with text To move rapidly within a track, press
the file or track name. data, the album and track name are and hold the or side of the
shown in the display. With a disc in SEEK/SKIP button.
The display shows up to about 16 MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
characters of selected text data (the folder and file name.
folder name, file name, etc.). If the
text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the ＞ indicator in
128
０５／０８／０２１４：５２：００３１ＳＶＡ６０００１３２
In MP3 or WMA mode repeat, press the RPT button twice. seconds to return to normal play.
FOLDER SELECTION − To You will hear a beep and see F-RPT
select a different folder, turn the in the display. The system In MP3 or WMA mode
TUNE knob to move the beginning continuously replays the current FOLDER-RANDOM − This
of the next folder. Turn the knob to folder. Press the RPT button again to feature, when activated, plays all
the right to skip to the next folder, turn it off. Pressing the RDM button, files in each folder in random order.
and to the left to move to the or selecting a different folder with To activate folder random, press the
beginning of the current folder. Turn the TUNE knob also turns off the RDM button 2 times. You will hear a
Features
it again to skip to the beginning of repeat feature. beep and see F-RDM in the display.
the previous folder. Turning the The system will then select and play
TUNE knob more than one click Each time you press and release the files randomly. This continues until
skips several folders at a time. RPT button, the mode changes from you deactivate folder random by
file repeat to folder repeat, then to pressing the RDM button again, or
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE normal playing. by selecting a different folder with
REPEAT) − To continuously replay the TUNE knob.
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode), RANDOM (Random within a
press and release the RPT button. disc/folder) − This feature plays Each time you press and release the
You will see RPT in the display. the tracks within a disc (the files RDM button, the mode changes
Press and hold the RPT button for 2 within a folder in MP3 or WMA from folder random play to random
seconds to turn it off. mode) in random order. To activate play (within a folder random play),
random play, press and release the then to normal playing.
In MP3 or WMA mode RDM button. In MP3 or WMA mode,
FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature, press the RDM button repeatedly to
when activated, replays all files on select RDM (within a folder random
the selected folder in the order they play). You will see RDM in the
are compressed. To activate folder display. Press the RDM button for 2 CONTINUED
129
０５／０８／０２１４：５２：１１３１ＳＶＡ６０００１３３
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) − In MP3 or WMA mode To Stop Playing a Disc

The scan function samples all tracks F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN) − This Press the eject button ( ) to
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in feature, when activated, samples the remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
the order they are recorded on the first file of each folder on the disc. but do not remove it from the slot,
disc. To activate scan, press the To activate folder scan, press the the system will automatically reload
SCAN button. In MP3 or WMA SCAN button twice. You will see it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode, press the SCAN button F-SCAN in the display. mode. To begin playing, press the
repeatedly to select SCAN. You will CD button.
see SCAN in the display. You will get The system plays the first file in the
a 10 second sampling of each track/ first folder for about 10 seconds. If You can also eject the disc when the
file on the disc. Press the SCAN you do nothing, the system will then ignition switch is off.
button again to get out of scan mode play the first files in the remaining
and play the last track/file sampled. folders for 10 seconds each. After To play the radio when a disc is
playing the first file of the last folder, playing, press the AM or FM button
Pressing either side of the SEEK/ the system plays normally. (the AM/FM button or XM button
SKIP button also turns off the scan on models that are XM radio
feature. Pressing either side of the SEEK/ capable). Press the CD button again
SKIP button, selecting a different to switch back to the disc player.
folder with the TUNE knob, or
pressing the SCAN button, also turns
off the folder scan.
Each time you press and release the

SCAN button, the mode changes
from folder scan to scan, then to
normal playing.
130
０５／０８／０２１４：５２：２０３１ＳＶＡ６０００１３４
If you turn the system off while a Operating the Optional Disc If you select an empty slot in the
disc is playing, either with the Changer magazine, the changer will search
power/volume knob or by turning An optional six or eight disc changer for the next available disc to load and
off the ignition switch, the disc will is available for your vehicle. This play.
stay in the drive. When you turn the disc changer uses the same controls
system back on, the disc will begin used for the in-dash disc player or Protecting Discs
playing where it left off. the radio. For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
Features
Load the desired discs in the 169 .
magazine, and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the disc changer, press the

CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use the preset 4
(DISC −) or the preset 1 (DISC ＋)
on the preset button. To select the
previous disc, press the preset 4
(DISC −), or the preset 1 (DISC ＋)
to select the next disc in sequence.
131
０５／０８／０２１４：５２：２９３１ＳＶＡ６０００１３５
Disc Player Error Messages

If you see an error message in the Error Cause Solution
display while playing a disc, find the Message
cause in the chart to the right. If you Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
cannot clear the error message, take FOCUS Error Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc
your vehicle to your dealer. player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
Mechanical Error If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
132
０５／０８／０２１４：５２：３９３１ＳＶＡ６０００１３６
Optional Disc Changer Error

Messages Error Cause Solution
If you see an error message in the Message
display while playing a disc, find the Press the magazine eject button, and pull the
cause in the chart to the right. If you FOCUS Error magazine out. If the message does not
cannot clear the error message, take disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
your vehicle to your dealer. see your dealer.
No disc in the disc Insert disc.
Features
magazine
Press the magazine eject button, pull the
magazine out, check for an error message, then
Mechanical Error insert the magazine again. If the message does
not disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulled
out, see your dealer.
No disc magazine in the Insert disc magazine.
disc changer
normal.
133
０５／０８／０２１４：５２：４７３１ＳＶＡ６０００１３７
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Voice Control System Playing the AM/FM Radio

In addition to the standard audio
controls, the audio system in your
vehicle can be operated using the
voice control system. See the FM2 ICON
navigation section in your quick start
guide for an overview of this system, FM1 ICON AM ICON
and the navigation system manual
for complete details.
AM/FM
BUTTON
AUTO SELECT
AUDIO ICON
BUTTON BACKGROUND
SCAN ICON
BUTTON SOUND ICON
TUNE BAR PRESET BUTTONS
134
０５／０８／０２１４：５２：５７３１ＳＶＡ６０００１３８
To Play the AM/FM Radio The band and frequency that the To Select a Station
The ignition switch must be in the radio was last turned to are displayed. You can use any of five methods to
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. To change bands, press the AM/FM find radio stations on the selected
Turn the system on by pushing the button, or touch the desired band band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the
power/volume knob or the AM/FM icon (FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2). preset buttons, and AUTO SELECT .
button. Adjust the volume by turning On the FM band, STEREO will be
the power/volume knob. displayed if the station is TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo the radio to a desired frequency.
Features
Pushing the AUDIO button will also reproduction on AM is not available. Press the ▲ side of the bar to tune
turn on the system. to a higher frequency, and press the
For information on XM radio, see ▼ side to tune to a lower
You can also operate the audio page 138 . frequency.
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Use the Press and hold the ▲ or ▼ side of
control buttons on the left side of the the TUNE bar until you hear two
screen. The status bar appears on beeps to change the frequency
the bottom of the screen each time rapidly. Release the bar when the
you operate any of the control display reaches the desired
buttons. On the navigation screen, frequency.
you can also see audio information
by touching the AUDIO INFO icon
on the lower of the screen.
CONTINUED
135
０５／０８／０２１４：５３：０７３１ＳＶＡ６０００１３９
SEEK − The seek function If you do nothing, the system will Each preset button’s frequency is
searches up and down from the then scan for the next strong station shown on the bottom of the audio
current frequency to find a station and play it for 10 seconds. When it display.
with a strong signal. To activate it, plays a station you want to listen to,
press and hold the ▲ or ▼ side of press the SCAN button again.
the TUNE bar until you hear a beep,
then release it. Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
SCAN − The scan function samples frequencies on FM.
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press 1. Select the desired band, AM or
the SCAN button, then release it. FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
You will see SCAN in the display. two frequencies with each preset
The system will scan for a station button.
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
for about 10 seconds. function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button, and hold it

until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a

total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
136
０５／０８／０２１４：５３：１４３１ＳＶＡ６０００１４０
AUTO SELECT − If you are You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
traveling far from home and can no pressing a preset button if auto
longer receive your preset stations, select cannot find a strong station for
you can use the auto select feature to every preset button.
find stations in the local area.
If you do not like the stations auto
Press the AUDIO button to view the select has stored, you can store
audio control icons, then press the other frequencies on the preset
Features
AUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTO buttons as previously described.
SEL flashing in the display, and the
system goes into scan mode for To turn off auto select, press the
several seconds. It stores the AUTO SEL icon. This restores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve presets you originally set.
FM stations in the preset buttons.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
167 .
137
０５／０８／０２１４：５３：２１３１ＳＶＡ６０００１４１

Playing the XM Satellite Radio *
XM RADIO ICON MODE ICON
POWER/VOLUME JOYSTICK
KNOB
CATEGORY
INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON
XM RADIO
BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET CHANNEL
NUMBER
TUNE BAR PRESET BUTTONS

* U.S. models only
138
０５／０８／０２１４：５３：３２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１４２
Your audio system is capable of Operating the XM Radio MODE − To switch between
receiving XM Satellite Radio To listen to XM radio, turn the channel mode and category mode,
anywhere in the United States, ignition switch to the ACCESSORY touch the MODE icon. In channel
except Hawaii and Alaska. (I) or the ON (II) position. Push the mode, you can select all of the
power/volume knob to turn on the available channels. In category mode,
XM is a registered trademark of audio system, and press the CD/XM such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.,
XM Satellite Radio, Inc. button. Adjust the volume by turning you can select all of the channels
the knob. The last channel you within that category. Each time you
Features
XM radio receives signals from two listened to will show in the display. touch and release the MODE icon,
satellites to produce clear, high- the display changes between the
quality digital reception. It offers You can also change to the XM radio channel mode and the category
many channels in several categories. while you are listening to an FM mode.
Along with a large selection of station, AM station, disc, pc card, etc.,
different types of music, XM radio by touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
allows you to view channel and the audio display.
category selections in the display.
When you press and hold the You can also operate the radio using
AUDIO button, the display also the control buttons on the left side of
shows all XM information. the screen. The status bar appears
on the bottom of the screen each
time you press any of the control
buttons. On the navigation screen,
you can also see the audio
information by touching the AUDIO
INFO icon on the lower of the screen.
CONTINUED
139
０５／０８／０２１４：５３：４５３１ＳＶＡ６０００１４３
TUNE − Press the TUNE bar to Preset − You can store up to 12

change channel selections. Press preset channels using each preset
▲ for higher numbered channels button or preset icons on the screen.
and ▼ for lower numbered Each preset button or icon stores
channels. In the category mode, you one channel from the XM1 band and
can only select channels within that one channel from the XM2 band.
category.
To store a channel:
CATEGORY − Press and hold
either side of the TUNE bar 1. Press the XM button. Either XM1
( or ) until you hear a beep or XM2 will show in the display.
to select another category.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
On the audio display, you will see the SCAN − The scan function gives function to tune to a desired
selected CHANNEL (number), you a sampling of all channels while channel.
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name), in the channel mode. In the category
and TITLE (music title). mode, only the channels within that In category mode, only channels
category are scanned. To activate within that category can be selected.
You may experience periods when scan, press the SCAN button or In channel mode, all channels can be
XM Radio does not transmit the touch the SCAN icon on the screen. selected.
artist’s name and song title The system plays each channel in
information. If this happens, there is numerical order for a few seconds, 3. Pick the preset button (icon) you
nothing wrong with your system. then selects the next channel. When want for that channel. Press and
you hear a channel you want to listen hold the button (icon) until you
to, press the button or touch the icon hear a beep.
again.
140
０５／０８／０２１４：５３：５６３１ＳＶＡ６０００１４４
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the XM Radio Display Messages ‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
first six channels. currently too weak. Move the vehicle
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the to an area away from tall buildings,
5. Press the XM button again or audio or program information. and with an unobstructed view of the
touch the other XM icon (XM1 or southern horizon.
XM2) on the audio display. Store ‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
the next six channels using steps 2 currently selected is no longer ‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
and 3. broadcasting. number does not exist or is not part
Features
of your subscription.
Once a channel is stored, press and ‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
release the proper preset button code is being updated. Wait until the ‘‘NO INFO’’ − This channel has no
(icon) to tune to it. Each preset encryption code is fully updated. artist or title information at this time.
button’s channel is shown on the Channels 0 and 1 should still work
bottom of the audio display. normally. ‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
CONTINUED
141
０５／０８／０２１４：５４：０２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１４５
The XM satellites are in orbit over

Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in the equator; therefore, objects south
mountains or large obstacles to these areas. of the vehicle may cause satellite
the south. reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be

blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
SATELLITE
GROUND
REPEATER
142
０５／０８／０２１４：５４：１７３１ＳＶＡ６０００１４６
Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly Your I.D. will appear in the display.
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for
these conditions: compliance could void the user’s After you’ve registered with XM
authority to operate the equipment. Radio, keep your audio system in the
Driving on the north side of an satellite radio mode while you wait
east/west mountain road. Receiving Satellite Radio Service for activation. This should take about
Driving on the north side of a If your XM Radio service has expired 30 minutes.
Features
large commercial truck on an or you purchased your vehicle from
east/west road. a previous owner, you can listen to a While waiting for activation, make
Driving in tunnels. sampling of the broadcasts available sure your vehicle remains in an open
Driving on a road beside a vertical on XM Satellite Radio. With the area with good reception. Once your
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south ignition switch in the ACCESSORY audio system is activated, you’ll be
of you. (I) or ON (II) position, push the able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
Driving on the lower level of a power/volume knob to turn on the XM Radio will continue to send an
multi-tiered road. audio system and press the XM activation signal to your vehicle for
Driving on a single lane road RADIO button. A variety of music at least 12 hours from the activation
alongside dense trees taller than types and styles will play. request. If the service has not been
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Large items carried on a roof rack. If you decide to purchase XM Radio.
Satellite Radio service, contact XM
There may be other geographic Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
situations that could affect XM radio 1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
reception. them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press the TUNE
143
０５／０８／０２１４：５４：３２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１４７
Adjusting the Sound BALANCE − Adjusts the side-to-

side strength of the sound.
SPEAKER SETTING To adjust the left/right balance,
touch the L or R icon.
SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the

strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker. To adjust the
sound strength, touch or
on each side of the adjustment
bar.
BASS/TREBLE SETTING
SOUND ICON The right upper display shows you
BASS − Adjusts the bass. the current setting of the sound
You can adjust the sound on the TREBLE − Adjusts the treble. To strength coming from each speaker.
navigation screen. To adjust the adjust the treble and bass, touch
sound, push the AUDIO button, then or on each side of the SVC (speed-sensitive volume
enter the sound grid by touching the treble or bass adjustment bar. The compensation) − The SVC mode
SOUND icon on the display. adjustment bar on the right lower controls the volume based on vehicle
display shows you the current speed. The faster you go, the louder
setting. the audio volume becomes. As you
slow down, the audio volume
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back decreases. Touch the appropriate
strength of the sound. To adjust the icon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select the
front/rear fader, touch the FR or RR mode.
icon.
144
０５／０８／０２１４：５４：４０３１ＳＶＡ６０００１４８
This function is set to MID as the Screen Mode Audio System Lighting
default setting when the vehicle You can select the background You can use the instrument panel
leaves the factory. If you feel the screen to display the sound level. brightness control buttons to adjust
sound is too loud, choose low. If you There are three screen modes: level the illumination of the audio system
feel the sound is too quiet, choose Hi. (the sound level is shown with the (see page 71 ). The audio system
vertical bars), spectrum analysis (the illuminates when the parking lights
You can also select the icon with the sound level appears as ripples of are on, even if the radio is off.
joystick. Move it up and down to water), and off. Each time you touch
Features
move the highlighting and scroll the background icon, the display
through lists. Select the icon, then changes.
move the joystick to left or right to
change the setting.
The system will return to the audio

display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
145
０５／０８／０２１４：５４：４７３１ＳＶＡ６０００１４９

Playing a Disc
CD ICON
POWER/VOLUME JOYSTICK
KNOB
OPEN BUTTON
CD BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE BAR
RANDOM FAST FORWARD SKIP＋BUTTON

BUTTON BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON SKIP−BUTTON
146
０５／０８／０２１４：５５：０５３１ＳＶＡ６０００１５０
To Play a Disc Video CDs and DVD discs do not The specifications for compatible
You operate the disc player with the work in this unit. WMA files are:
same controls used for the radio. To −Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48
load or play discs, the ignition switch The specifications for compatible kHz
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or MP3 files are: −Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/
ON (II) position. −Sampling frequency: 128/160/192 kbps
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) −Compatible with variable bit rate
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2) and multi-session
Features
−Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ −Maximum layers
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. 112/128/160/192/224/ (including ROOT): 8 layers
The label can curl up and cause the 256/320 kbps (MPEG1)
disc to jam in the unit. 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/ NOTE:
64/80/96/112/128/160 If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
This audio system can also play CD- kbps (MPEG2) protected by digital rights
Rs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3 −Compatible with variable bit rate management (DRM), the audio unit
or WMA formats. When playing a and multi-session displays CD FORMAT, and then
disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ on −Maximum layers skips to the next file.
the screen. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’ (including ROOT): 8 layers
will appear on the screen. You can
select up to 99 folders and play up to
999 tracks. If the disc has a complex
structure, it takes a while to read the
disc before the system begins to play
it.
CONTINUED
147
０５／０８／０２１４：５５：１５３１ＳＶＡ６０００１５１
To Load a Disc
DISC SLOT
OPEN BUTTON CLOSE BUTTON
The disc player is behind the Insert a disc about halfway into the To return the screen to the upright
navigation screen. To use the disc disc slot. The drive will pull the disc position, press the CLOSE button on
player, press the OPEN button in the rest of the way and begin to the edge of the screen panel. Do not
beside the screen. The screen folds play it. use the folded screen as a tray. If
back, and the disc player appears. you put a cup, for example, on the
You cannot load and play 3-inch screen, the liquid inside the cup may
(8-cm) discs in this system. spill on the screen when you go over
a bump.
148
０５／０８／０２１４：５５：２６３１ＳＶＡ６０００１５２
Push the AUDIO button beside the To Change or Select Tracks/Files You can also select an icon with the
screen to show the audio display and joystick. Move it to left, right, up, or
operate the disc player. PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION down to change the highlighting and
scroll through lists. Then press the
You can also operate the audio ENT on the top of the joystick to
system without using the control select the icon.
icons on the audio screen. Press the
CD button. The status bar appears SKIP − Each time you press and
Features
on the bottom of the screen. On the release (preset 6), the player
navigation screen, you can see the skips forward to the beginning of the
audio information whenever you next track (file in MP3 or WMA
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the mode). Press and release
lower of the screen. PRESET BUTTONS (preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track.
When playing a CD recorded with You can use the preset buttons while Press it again to skip to the
text data, the track, album, and artist a disc is playing to select passages beginning of the previous track.
name are shown on the audio display. and change tracks (files in MP3 or
When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA, WMA mode). Each preset button’s FF/REW − To move rapidly within
the folder number and name, the file function is shown on the bottom of a track/file, press and hold
number and name, the artist name, the screen. (preset 4) or (preset 3).
and the elapsed time are shown. The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes. If the disc
was not recorded with text data, it
will not be displayed.
CONTINUED
149
０５／０８／０２１４：５５：３５３１ＳＶＡ６０００１５３
In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION − To FOLDER REPEAT − This feature, FOLDER RANDOM − This
select a different folder, press either when activated, replays all files on feature, when activated, plays all
side of the TUNE bar to move to the the selected folder in the order they files in each folder in random order,
beginning of the next folder. Press are compressed. To activate folder rather than in the order they are
the ▲ side of the TUNE bar to skip repeat, press and hold the RPT compressed. To activate folder
to the next folder, and the ▼ side to button (preset 1). You will see random, press the RDM button
move to the beginning of the current FOLDER REPEAT in the display. (preset 2) twice. You will see
folder. Press it again to skip to the The system continuously replays the FOLDER RANDOM in the display.
beginning of the previous folder. current folder. Press the RPT button The system then selects and plays
again to turn it off. Pressing the files randomly. This continues until
TRACK REPEAT (FILE RDM button or selecting a different you deactivate folder random by
REPEAT) − To continuously replay folder with the TUNE bar also turns pressing the RDM button again, or if
a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode), off folder repeat. you select a different folder with the
press and release the RPT button TUNE bar.
(preset 1). You will see TRACK TRACK RANDOM (Random
REPEAT in the display. Press and within a disc/folder) − This
hold the RPT button for 2 seconds to feature plays the tracks within a disc
turn it off. (the files within a folder) in random
order. To activate track random,
press and release the RDM button
(preset 2). You will see TRACK
RANDOM in the display. Press and
hold the RDM button for 2 seconds
to return to normal play.
150
０５／０８／０２１４：５５：４６３１ＳＶＡ６０００１５４
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) − In MP3 or WMA mode Using a Track List

The scan function samples all tracks FOLDER SCAN − This feature,
(files in MP3 or WMA) in the order when activated, samples all the first FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE ICON
they were recorded. To activate scan, files in each folder on the disc in
press and release the SCAN button. order. To activate folder scan, press
You will see TRACK SCAN in the and hold the SCAN button. You will
display. You will get a 10 second see FOLDER SCAN in the display.
sampling of each track/file on the
Features
disc. Press and hold the SCAN The system plays the first file in
button for 2 seconds to get out of each folder for about 10 seconds. If
scan mode and play the last track/ you do nothing, the system then
file sampled. plays the first file in each folder for
10 seconds each. After playing the FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON
Pressing either SKIP button (preset first file of the last folder, the system
5 or 6) also turns off scan. goes to normal playing. You can also select a track/file
directly from a track list on the audio
Pressing either SKIP button (preset display. Press the AUDIO button to
5 or 6), or selecting a different folder show the audio display, then touch
with the TUNE bar, or pressing the the Track List icon. The track list
SCAN button, also turns off folder menu appears on the display.
scan.
CONTINUED
151
０５／０８／０２１４：５５：５８３１ＳＶＡ６０００１５５
When playing a CD recorded with To Stop Playing a Disc Removing a Disc

text data, each track name is shown To play the radio when a disc is To remove a disc from the audio unit,
in the audio display. With a disc playing, press the AM/FM button or fold back the screen by pressing the
recorded in MP3 or WMA, the folder touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or OPEN button (see page 148 ). Press
number and the location are also XM2 icon. If a PC card is in the audio the eject button ( ) to remove
displayed. unit, touch the CARD icon to play the disc. If you eject the disc, but do
the PC card. Press the CD button not remove it from the slot, the
If the disc was not recorded with text again or touch the CD icon to switch system will automatically reload it
data, only the track number is shown. back to the disc player. after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
To scroll through the display, touch If you turn the system off while a CD button.
the ▲ or ▼ icon on the side of the disc is playing, either with the
screen. To go back to the previous power/volume knob or by turning To return the screen to the upright
display, touch the Return icon on the off the ignition switch, the disc will position, press the CLOSE button.
screen. stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin You cannot close the screen if a disc
Select the desired track by touching playing where it left off. is partially inserted into its slot.
the icon on the display. The selected
icon will be highlighted in blue. The You can also eject the disc when the
system begins to play the selected ignition switch is off.
track or file. With a disc in MP3 or
WMA, touch the folder icon on the
upper left of the screen to move to
the parent folder. The current folder
is highlighted in blue.
152
０５／０８／０２１４：５６：０６３１ＳＶＡ６０００１５６
Operating the Optional Disc Protecting Discs

Changer For information on how to handle
An optional six or eight disc changer and protect discs, see page 169 .
is available for your vehicle. This
disc changer uses the same controls
used for the in-dash disc player or
the radio.
Features
Load the desired discs in the
magazine, and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the disc changer, press the

CD/AUX button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use either side of the
TUNE bar. To select the previous
disc, press the ▲ side. To select the
next disc, press the ▼ side.
If you select an empty slot in the

magazine, the changer will search
for the next available disc to load and
play.
153
０５／０８／０２１４：５６：１５３１ＳＶＡ６０００１５７
Disc Player Error Messages

If you see an error message in the Error Cause Solution
display while playing a disc, find the Message
cause in the chart to the right. If you Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
cannot clear the error message, take FOCUS Error Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc
your vehicle to your dealer. player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Mechanical Error If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
TOC Error Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
normal.
154
０５／０８／０２１４：５６：２１３１ＳＶＡ６０００１５８
Playing a PC Card
TRACK LIST ICON PC CARD ICON
JOYSTICK
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
Features
PLAY MODE
OPEN BUTTON ICON
CD/XM BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE BAR
RANDOM FAST FORWARD SKIP ＋ BUTTON

BUTTON BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON SKIP − BUTTON
155
０５／０８／０２１４：５６：３８３１ＳＶＡ６０００１５９
To Play a PC card Always use the recommended Never insert foreign objects into
You operate the PC card player with memory card with the appropriate the PC card slot.
the same controls used for the radio adapter (if an adapter is needed).
and the disc player. To load or play a Some memory cards will not work in The specifications for compatible
card, the ignition switch must be in this unit. MP3 files are:
the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) −Sampling frequency:
position. NOTE: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
When you insert a PC card into 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
The PC card player reads and plays the slot, make sure you put it in −Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
cards in MP3 or WMA formats. straight. If you cannot insert it, 112/128/160/192/224/256/
Depending on the format, the screen remove it, and insert again. 320 kbps (MPEG1)
will indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ when 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/
a card is playing. The card limit of Do not keep PC cards in the 80/96/112/128/160 kbps
the player is 99 folders and 999 vehicle. Direct sunlight and high (MPEG2)
tracks. If the card has a complex heat will damage them. −Compatible with variable bit rate
structure, it takes some time for the and multi-session
system to begin playing it. To avoid damaging the card −Maximum layers
reader, do not insert hard disc (including ROOT): 8 layers
Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2, drive cards into the PC card slot.
the recommended PC cards for the
PC card reader are: You cannot close the screen
(move it to the upright position)
CompactFlash until the PC card is inserted all the
Flash ATA way into its slot or removed.
SD memory card
156
０５／０８／０２１４：５６：５２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１６０
The specifications for compatible Loading a PC Card Insert a PC card straight into the slot.
WMA files are: The drive will read the PC card and
−Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 PC CARD SLOT begin to play it.
kHz
−Bit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/ Return the screen to the upright
192 kbps position by pressing the CLOSE
−Compatible with variable bit rate button on the edge of the screen
and multi-session panel.
Features
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers Push the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
In WMA format, DRM (digital rights operate the PC card player.
management) files cannot be played.
If the system finds a DRM file, it You can also operate the audio
skips that file and plays the next The PC card slot is behind the system without using the control
available folder or file. navigation screen. To use the PC icons on the audio screen. Press any
card player, press the OPEN button of the appropriate control buttons.
beside the screen. The screen folds The status bar appears on the
back, and the PC card slot appears. bottom of the screen. On the
navigation screen, you can see the
audio information whenever you
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the
screen.
CONTINUED
157
０５／０８／０２１４：５７：０５３１ＳＶＡ６０００１６１
There are three play modes: Folder, To Select a Play Mode

Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAY
MODE icon, then choose one of the FOLDER MODE
PLAY MODE ICON
modes by touching its icon. When a
mode is selected, it is highlighted in
blue. MODE INDICATOR
Folder mode plays tracks in the

order they were added to the card.
Artist mode plays tracks in

alphabetical order, by artist and
song title.
PLAY MODE ICON PLAY MODE ICON
Album mode plays albums ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE
(folders) in alphabetical order.
If play mode information was not

included in the tracks when they
were added to the card, it will not be
displayed on the screen.
MODE INDICATOR MODE INDICATOR
158
０５／０８／０２１４：５７：１３３１ＳＶＡ６０００１６２
PLAY MODE ICON
Features
To select a play mode, push the Select the desired mode by touching After you select the play mode, the
AUDIO button to show the audio the appropriate icon, or move the display changes to the selectable
display, then touch the PLAY MODE joystick, then press the ENT. playing menu. If you select
icon on the display. ‘‘Continue playing the Current Song,’’
the system goes into the selected
play mode after playing the current
file.
CONTINUED
159
０５／０８／０２１４：５７：２３３１ＳＶＡ６０００１６３
If you select ‘‘Play a New Track List,’’ To Change or Select Tracks/Files Icons on the screen can also be
the system goes into the selected selected with the joystick. Move the
play mode immediately and begins to joystick left or right and up or down
play the files in order to the new list. until the icon is highlighted, then
press the ENT on the top of the
To go back to the previous screen, joystick to select the icon.
press the CANCEL button on the
right side of the screen. To exit the
play mode screens, press the AUDIO
button.
PRESET BUTTONS
You can use the preset buttons while

a card is playing to select or change
files. Each preset button’s function is
shown on the bottom of the screen.
160
０５／０８／０２１４：５７：３２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１６４
SKIP − Each time you press and TRACK REPEAT (FILE TRACK RANDOM (Random
release (preset 6), the player REPEAT) − To continuously replay within a folder) − This feature
skips forward to the beginning of the a file, press and release the RPT plays the files within a folder in
next file. Press and release button (preset 1). You will see random order. To activate track
(preset 5), to skip backward to TRACK REPEAT in the display. random, press and release the RDM
the beginning of the current file. Press the RPT button again to turn it button (preset 2). You will see
Press it again to skip to the off. TRACK RANDOM in the display.
beginning of the previous file. Press and hold the RDM button for 2
Features
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM seconds to return to normal play.
FF/REW − To move rapidly within REPEAT − This feature, when
a file, press and hold (preset 4) activated, replays all the files on the FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
or (preset 3). selected folder/artist/album in the RANDOM − This feature, when
order they are recorded or listed. To activated, plays all files in each
FOLDER SELECTION − To activate each repeat mode, press and folder/artist/album in random order,
select a different folder, press either hold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2 rather than in the order they are
side of the TUNE bar to move the seconds. You will see FOLDER recorded or listed. To activate each
beginning of the next folder. Press REPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT or random play, press the RDM button
the ▲ side of the TUNE bar to skip ALBUM REPEAT in the display. (preset 2) 2 times. You will see
the next folder, and to the ▼ side to The system continuously replays the FOLDER RANDOM, ARTIST
move the beginning of the current current folder/artist/album. Press RANDOM or ALBUM RANDOM in
folder. Press it again to skip to the and hold the RPT button for 2 the display.
beginning of the previous folder. seconds again to turn it off. Pressing
the RDM button, or selecting a
different folder/artist/album with
the TUNE bar also turns off the
repeat feature. CONTINUED
161
０５／０８／０２１４：５７：４０３１ＳＶＡ６０００１６５
The system then selects and plays FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
files randomly. This continues until SCAN − This feature, when (preset 5 or 6), selecting a different
you deactivate each random play by activated, samples the first file in folder/artist/album with the TUNE
pressing the RDM button again, or each folder/artist/album on the PC bar, or pressing the SCAN button,
you select a different folder/artist/ card in order. To activate each scan also turns off the scan feature.
album with the TUNE bar. feature, press and hold the SCAN
button until you hear a beep. You will
SCAN − The scan function samples see FOLDER SCAN, ARTIST SCAN
all files on the PC card in the order or ALBUM SCAN in the display.
they are recorded. To activate scan,
press and release the SCAN button. The system plays the first file in the
You will see TRACK SCAN in the folder for about 10 seconds. If you do
display. You will get a 10 second nothing, the system plays the first
sampling of each file on the PC card. file in each folder, in order, for 10
Press and hold the SCAN button for seconds each. After playing the first
2 seconds to get out of scan mode file of the last folder/artist/album,
and play the last file sampled. the system returns to normal play.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons

(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scan
feature.
162
０５／０８／０２１４：５７：５２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１６６
Using a Track List
FOLDER ICON ARTIST NAME
Features
TRACK LIST ICON RETURN ICON
You can also select a file directly To scroll through the display, touch In artist mode, the artist name is
from a track list on the audio display. the ▲ or ▼ icon on the side of the displayed on the right side of each
Press the AUDIO button to show the screen. To go back to the previous selectable icon. Select the desired
audio display, then touch the Track display, touch the Return icon. file.
List icon. The track list menu
appears on the display. To play a file, touch its icon on the
screen. In folder mode, touch the
folder icon on the upper left of the
screen to move to the parent folder.
The current folder is highlighted in
blue.
CONTINUED
163
０５／０８／０２１４：５８：０２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１６７
Song Search Function
ALBUM NAME SONG SEARCH ICON TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON
RETURN ICON
Folder mode is shown. ARTIST ICON ALBUM ICON
In album mode, the album name is When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ from You can then select any of three
displayed on the right side of each the track list display, the song search modes to search a file: Title by
selectable icon. Select the desired menu appears. Keyword, Artist, and Album.
file.
164
０５／０８／０２１４：５８：１４３１ＳＶＡ６０００１６８
Searching for a Song Title by Keyword To cancel the selected letter, select Searching for a Song by Artist Name
the letter and touch the Delete icon.
MORE ICON To select more characters, touch the ARTIST LIST
More icon. The other character list
will be shown.
FILE LIST
Features
DELETE ICON LIST ICON
In Title by Keyword mode, enter the Select the Artist icon, and the artist
title name, or any keyword, by list appears. Select the desired artist,
touching the letter icons on the and the artist’s file list is displayed.
screen. Press the List icon to begin
the song search. If you press the After the system searches for a song,
CANCEL button on the screen, the a file list is displayed. To scroll
display returns to the mode menu through the list, touch the ▲ or ▼
without doing a search. icon on the side of the screen. Select
the desired file by touching the
appropriate icon, or moving the
joystick and pressing the ENT.
CONTINUED
165
０５／０８／０２１４：５８：２８３１ＳＶＡ６０００１６９
Searching for a Song by Album Name To Stop Playing a PC card Removing a PC Card
To play the radio when a PC card is To remove a PC card from the audio
ALBUM LIST playing, press the AM/FM button or unit, fold back the screen by
touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or pressing the OPEN button (see page
XM2 icon. If a disc is in the audio 148 ). Press the eject button ( )
unit, press the CD button or touch to remove the card. If you do not
the CD icon to play the disc. Touch remove it from the slot, you cannot
the CARD icon to switch back to the return the screen to the upright
PC card player. position.
If you turn the system off while a PC To return the screen to the upright
card is playing, either with the position, press the CLOSE button.
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the card will You can also eject a card when the
Select the Album icon, and the stay in the drive. When you turn the ignition switch is off.
album list appears. Select the desired system back on, the card will begin
album, and its song list is displayed. playing where it left off. PC Card Player Malfunction
You can then select the desired song If there is a problem with the PC
from the list. When you leave the vehicle, always card player, see your dealer.
remove the PC card from the audio
unit.
166
０５／０８／０２１４：５８：４０３１ＳＶＡ６０００１７０
AM/FM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the station’s
cies: transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz A radio station’s signal gets weaker
Features
as you get farther away from its
Radio stations on the AM band are transmitter. If you are listening to an
assigned frequencies at least 10 AM station, you will notice the sound
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550). volume becoming weaker, and the
Stations on the FM band are station drifting in and out. If you are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2 listening to an FM station, you will Driving very near the transmitter of
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). see the stereo indicator flickering off a station that is broadcasting on a
and on as the signal weakens. frequency close to the frequency of
Stations must use these exact Eventually, the stereo indicator will the station you are listening to can
frequencies. It is fairly common for go off and the sound will fade also affect your radio’s reception.
stations to round-off the frequency in completely as you get out of range of You may temporarily hear both
their advertising, so your radio could the station’s signal. stations, or hear only the station you
display a frequency of 100.9 even are close to.
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
CONTINUED
167
０５／０８／０２１４：５８：４８３１ＳＶＡ６０００１７１
AM/FM Radio Reception
Electrical interference from passing

vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:

approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by

band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
168
０５／０８／０２１４：５９：０１３１ＳＶＡ６０００１７２
Protecting Your Discs
General Information Protecting Discs

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, When a disc is not being played,
use only high quality discs labeled store it in its case to protect it from
for audio use. dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
When recording a CD-R or direct sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Features
system. Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped discs may jam in the A new disc may be rough on the
drive or cause other problems. inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a disc by its edges; never
Handle your discs properly to can flake off and fall on the touch either surface. Do not place
prevent damage and skipping. recording surface of the disc, stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
causing skipping or other problems. These, along with contamination
Remove these pieces by rubbing the from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
inner and outer edges with the side pens, can cause the disc to not play
Do not use discs with adhesive labels. of a pencil or pen. properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit. Never try to insert foreign objects in
the system or the magazine.
169
０５／０８／０２１４：５９：１２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１７３
Remote Audio Controls
CH BUTTON MODE BUTTON The VOL button adjusts the volume beep. The system searches up or
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top down from the current frequency to
or bottom of the button, hold it until find a station with a strong signal.
the desired volume is reached, then
release it. If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
The MODE button changes the track (file in MP3 or WMA format)
mode. Pressing the button each time you press the top (＋) of
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, the CH button. Press the bottom
disc (if a disc is loaded), or a PC card (−) to return to the beginning of the
(if it is loaded). On models with current track or file. Press it twice to
VOL BUTTON satellite radio system, you can also return to the previous track or file.
select XM radio.
If equipped You will see the track/file number
Three controls for the audio system If you are listening to the radio, use and the elapsed time. If the disc has
are mounted in the steering wheel the CH button to change stations. text data or is compressed in MP3 or
hub. These let you control basic Each time you press and release the WMA, you can also see any other
functions without removing your top (＋) of the button, the system information (track title, file name,
hand from the wheel. goes to the next preset station on the folder name, etc.).
band you are listening to. Press and
release the bottom (−) to go back to
the previous station.
To activate the seek function, press

and hold the top (＋) or bottom (−)
of the CH button until you hear a
170
０５／０８／０２１４：５９：１９３１ＳＶＡ６０００１７４
Remote Audio Controls, Playing an Optional Audio Unit
If you are playing a PC card, press Auxiliary Input Jack

the top (＋) of the CH button to The auxiliary input jack is
advance to the next file. Press the underneath the accessory power
bottom (−) to go back to the socket on the front panel. The
previous file. system will accept auxiliary input
from standard audio accessories.
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use
the seek function to select folders. When a compatible audio unit is
Features
Press and hold the top (＋) of the connected to the jack, press the AUX
CH button until you hear a beep, to button to select it.
skip forward to the first file of the
next folder. Press the bottom (−) to
skip backward to the previous folder.
171
０５／０８／０２１４：５９：２７３１ＳＶＡ６０００１７５
Radio Theft Protection
U.S. LX, EX, Si and all Canadian models If your vehicle’s battery is
Your vehicle’s audio system will disconnected or goes dead, or the
disable itself if it is disconnected radio fuse is removed, the audio
from electrical power for any reason. system will disable itself. If this
To make it work again, the user you happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER
must enter a specific code with the CODE’’ in the frequency display the
preset buttons (icons on vehicles next time you turn on the system.
with navigation system). Because Use the preset buttons (icons on
there are hundreds of number vehicles with navigation system) to
combinations possible, making the enter the code. The code is on the
system work without knowing the radio code card included in your
exact code is nearly impossible. owner’s manual kit. When it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
You should have received a card that playing.
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this If you make a mistake entering the
card in a safe place at home. In code, do not start over; complete the
addition, you should write the audio sequence, then enter the correct
system’s serial number in this owner’s code. You have 10 tries to enter the
manual. correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in 10 attempts, you must then leave
If you lose the card, you must obtain the system on for 1 hour before
the code number from a dealer. To trying again.
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
172
０５／０８／０２１４：５９：３９３１ＳＶＡ６０００１７６
Setting the Clock
On models without navigation system U.S. LX and all Canadian models U.S. EX and Si models
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you will CLOCK BUTTON CLOCK BUTTON
need to set the clock.
To set the time, press the CLOCK

(AM, AM/FM) button until the
displayed time begins to blink, then
Features
release the button.
Change the hours by pressing the H

(preset 1) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(preset 2) button until the numbers
HOUR BUTTON RESET BUTTON HOUR BUTTON RESET BUTTON
advance to the desired time.
MINUTE BUTTON MINUTE BUTTON
Press the CLOCK (AM, AM/FM)
button again to enter the set time.
to the previous hour. If the displayed On models with navigation system
You can quickly set the time to the time is after the half hour, the clock The navigation system receives
nearest hour. If the displayed time is sets forward to the beginning of the signals from the global positioning
before the half hour, pressing the next hour. system (GPS), and the displayed
CLOCK (AM, AM/FM) button until For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00 time is updated automatically by the
you hear a beep, then pressing the R 1:52 will reset to 2:00 GPS. Refer to the navigation system
(preset 3) button sets the clock back manual for how to adjust the time.
173
０５／０８／０２１４：５９：４９３１ＳＶＡ６０００１７７
Security System
If equipped SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR alarm will sound if the trunk lock is
The security system helps to protect forced, or the trunk is opened with
your vehicle and valuables from theft. the trunk release handle or the
The horn sounds and a combination emergency trunk opener.
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, and taillights flashes if The security system will not set if
someone attempts to break into your the hood, trunk, or either door is not
vehicle or remove the radio. This fully closed. If the system will not set,
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then check the door and trunk open
the system resets. To reset an indicators on the instrument panel
alarming system before the 2 (see page 61 ), to see if the doors
minutes have elapsed, unlock the and the trunk are fully closed. Since
driver’s door with the key or the it is not part of the monitor display,
remote transmitter. Once the security system is set, manually check the hood.
opening either door without using
The security system automatically the key or the remote transmitter, NOTE: Use the remote transmitter
sets 15 seconds after you lock the the hood, or the trunk will cause the to quickly check that the hood, the
doors, hood, and trunk. For the system to alarm. It also alarms if the trunk, and both doors are closed.
system to activate, you must lock the radio is removed from the dashboard Push the lock button twice within 5
doors from the outside with the key, or the wiring is cut. seconds. There should be an audible
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote confirmation beep.
transmitter. The security system With the system set, you can still
indicator on the instrument panel open the trunk with the master key Do not attempt to alter this system
starts blinking immediately to show (U.S. LX model) or the remote or add other devices to it.
you the system is setting itself. transmitter (U.S. EX and Si models)
without triggering the alarm. The
174
０５／０８／０２１５：００：０２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１７８
Cruise Control
If equipped Using Cruise Control 3. Press and release the DECEL/

Cruise control allows you to maintain SET button on the steering wheel.
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCEL The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
without keeping your foot on the on the instrument panel comes on
accelerator pedal. It should be used to show the system is now
for cruising on straight, open activated.
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery Cruise control may not hold the set
Features
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather. speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel the
Improper use of the cruise DECEL/SET CANCEL BUTTON cruise control. To resume the set
control can lead to a crash. speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
1. Push the CRUISE button on the The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
Use the cruise control only steering wheel. The CRUISE on the instrument panel will come
when traveling on open MAIN indicator on the instrument back on.
highways in good weather. panel comes on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising automatic transmission may
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). downshift to hold the set speed.
CONTINUED
175
０５／０８／０２１５：００：１２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１７９
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising Even with the cruise control turned
You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways: on, you can still use the accelerator
speed in any of these ways: pedal to speed up for passing. After
Press and hold the DECEL/SET completing the pass, take your foot
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. Release the button when off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
button. When you reach the you reach the desired speed. will return to the set cruising speed.
desired cruising speed, release the
button. To slow down in very small Resting your foot on the brake or
amounts, tap the DECEL/SET clutch pedal causes the cruise
Push on the accelerator pedal until button. Each time you do this, control to cancel.
you reach the desired cruising your vehicle slows down about 1
speed, then press the DECEL/ mph (1.6 km/h).
SET button.
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
To increase the speed in very lightly with your foot. The
small amounts, tap the RES/ CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
ACCEL button. Each time you do the instrument panel goes out.
this, your vehicle speeds up about When the vehicle slows to the
1 mph (1.6 km/h). desired speed, press the DECEL/
SET button.
176
０５／０８／０２１５：００：２０３１ＳＶＡ６０００１８０
Cruise Control
Cancelling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

You can cancel cruise control in any When you push the CANCEL button,
of these ways: or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system remembers the previously
Tap the brake or clutch pedal. set cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
Push the CANCEL button on the (40 km/h) and then press and
steering wheel. release the RES/ACCEL button. The
Features
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
Push the CRUISE button on the on, and the vehicle accelerates to the
steering wheel. same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns

the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.
177
０５／０８／０２１５：００：２３３１ＳＶＡ６０００１８１
Main Menu
178
０５／０８／０２１５：００：２７３１ＳＶＡ６０００１８２
Main Menu
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 180

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation .................. 180
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures .......... 181
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling..................................... 181
need to know how to properly store Opening and Closing
luggage or packages. The the Hood ................................. 182
information in this section will help Oil Check .................................... 183
you. If you plan to add any Engine Coolant Check .............. 185
accessories to your vehicle, please Fuel Economy ................................ 185
read the information in this section Accessories and Modifications .... 186
Before Driving
first. Carrying Cargo .............................. 188
179
０５／０８／０２１５：００：４０３１ＳＶＡ６０００１８３
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation We recommend using quality

Help assure your vehicle’s future All models except Si gasolines containing detergent
reliability and performance by paying Your vehicle is designed to operate additives that help prevent fuel
extra attention to how you drive on unleaded gasoline with a pump system and engine deposits.
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). octane number of 87 or higher. Use
During this period: of a lower octane gasoline can cause In addition, in order to maintain good
a persistent, heavy, metallic rapping performance, fuel economy, and
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid noise that can lead to engine damage. emissions control, we strongly
acceleration. recommend, in areas where it is
Si model only available, the use of gasoline that
Do not change the oil until the Your vehicle is designed to operate does NOT contain manganese-based
scheduled maintenance time. on premium unleaded gasoline with a fuel additives such as MMT.
pump octane of 91 or higher. Use of
Avoid hard braking for the first a lower octane gasoline can cause Use of gasoline with these additives
200 miles (300 km). occasional metallic knocking noises may adversely affect performance,
in the engine and will result in and cause the malfunction indicator
You should also follow these decreased engine performance. Use lamp on your instrument panel to
recommendations with an of a gasoline with a pump octane less come on. If this happens, contact
overhauled or exchanged engine, or than 87 can lead to engine damage. your authorized dealer for service.
when the brakes are replaced.
180
０５／０８／０２１５：００：５３３１ＳＶＡ６０００１８４
Service Station Procedures
Some gasoline today is blended with Refueling

oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to Push Gasoline is highly flammable
operate on oxygenated gasoline and explosive. You can be
containing up to 10% ethanol by burned or seriously injured
volume and up to 15% MTBE by when handling fuel.
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol. Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
If you notice any undesirable Handle fuel only outdoors.
Before Driving
operating symptoms, try another Wipe up spills immediately.
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
TETHER
For further important fuel-related 1. Park with the driver’s side closest
information, please refer to your to the service station pump.
Quick Start Guide.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pushing
On Si model on the handle to the left of the
You may hear a knocking noise from driver’s seat.
the engine if you drive the vehicle at
low engine speed (below about 1,000
rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,
raise the engine speed by shifting to FUEL FILL CAP
a lower gear.
CONTINUED
181
０５／０８／０２１５：０１：０４３１ＳＶＡ６０００１８５
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. 5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Opening and Closing the Hood
You may hear a hissing sound as until it clicks at least once. If you
pressure inside the tank escapes. do not properly tighten the cap, HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
The fuel fill cap is attached to the the malfunction indicator lamp
fuel filler with a tether. Place the may come on (see page 264 ). You
cap in the holder on the fuel fill will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
door. CAP’’ message on the information
display.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do 6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave it latches.
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off 1. Park the vehicle, and set the
even though the tank is not full, parking brake. Pull the hood
there may be a problem with your release handle under the lower left
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery corner of the dashboard. The
system. The system helps keep hood will pop up slightly.
fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
182
０５／０８／０２１５：０１：１７３１ＳＶＡ６０００１８６
Oil Check
SUPPORT ROD DIPSTICK
Before Driving
LATCH
CLIP DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
2. Put your fingers under the front 3. Pull the support rod out of its clip Wait a few minutes after turning the
edge of the hood near the center. by holding the grip, and insert the engine off before you check the oil.
Slide your hand to the left until end into the designated hole in the
you feel the hood latch handle. hood. 1. Remove the dipstick (orange
Push this handle up to release it. handle).
Lift up the hood. To close the hood, lift it up slightly
to remove the support rod from 2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
If the hood latch handle moves the hole. Put the support rod back cloth or paper towel.
stiffly, or if you can open the hood into its holding clip. Lower the
without lifting the handle, the hood to about a foot (30 cm) above 3. Insert it all the way back in its tube.
mechanism should be cleaned and the fender, then let it drop. Make
lubricated. sure it is securely latched. CONTINUED
183
０５／０８／０２１５：０１：２５３１ＳＶＡ６０００１８７
DIPSTICK DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX Si
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
UPPER MARK
Si LOWER MARK
4. Remove the dipstick again, and If it is near or below the lower mark,
check the level. It should be see Adding Engine Oil on page 220 .
between the upper and lower
marks.
184
０５／０８／０２１５：０１：３８３１ＳＶＡ６０００１８８
Service Station Procedures, Fuel Economy
Engine Coolant Check Improving Fuel Economy

Always maintain your vehicle
MAX RESERVE TANK MAX RESERVE TANK according to the maintenance
minder displayed in the
information display. See Owner’s
Maintenance Checks on page
214 .
For example, an underinflated tire

causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
Before Driving
which uses more fuel.
MIN
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX Si MIN The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds
Look at the coolant level in the Refer to Owner’s Maintenance weight and rolling resistance.
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is Checks on page 214 for information Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
between the MAX and MIN lines. If about checking other items on your mileage and reduces the chance of
it is below the MIN line, see Adding vehicle. corrosion.
Engine Coolant on page 224 for
information on adding the proper Drive moderately. Rapid
coolant. acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear

possible.
CONTINUED
185
０５／０８／０２１５：０１：４９３１ＳＶＡ６０００１８９
Fuel Economy, Accessories and Modifications
Try to maintain a constant speed. Accessories and Modifications

Every time you slow down and Modifying your vehicle, or installing
speed up, your vehicle uses extra some non-Honda accessories, can Improper accessories or
fuel. Use cruise control when make it unsafe. Before you make any modifications can affect your
appropriate. modifications or add any accessories, vehicle’s handling, stability, and
be sure to read the following performance, and cause a
Combine several short trips into information. crash in which you can be hurt
one. or killed.
Accessories
The air conditioning puts an extra Your dealer has Honda accessories Follow all instructions in this
load on the engine which makes it that allow you to personalize your owner’s manual regarding
use more fuel. Use the fresh-air vehicle, or improve its performance. accessories and modifications.
ventilation when possible. These accessories have been
designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
Although non-Honda accessories low-powered audio systems should
may fit on your vehicle, they may not not interfere with your vehicle’s
meet factory specifications, and computer controlled systems, such
could adversely affect your vehicle’s as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.
handling and stability.
186
０５／０８／０２１５：０２：０２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１９０
Accessories and Modifications
Before installing any accessory: Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tires
Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of
Make sure the accessory does not or replacing components with your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
obscure any lights, or interfere non-Honda components could other systems.
with proper vehicle operation or seriously affect your vehicle’s
performance. handling, stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
Be sure electronic accessories do Some examples are: safety features can make the
not overload electrical circuits systems ineffective.
(see page 266 ) or interfere with Lowering your vehicle with a
Before Driving
the proper operation of your non-Honda suspension kit that If you plan to modify your vehicle,
vehicle. significantly reduces ground consult your dealer.
clearance can allow the
Before installing any electronic undercarriage to hit speed bumps
accessory, have the installer or other raised objects, which
contact your dealer for assistance. could cause the airbags to deploy.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation. Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
Do not install accessories on the affect the handling and stability.
side pillars or across the rear
windows. In these areas, Non-Honda wheels, because they
accessories may interfere with are a universal design, can cause
proper operation of the side excessive stress on suspension
curtain airbags. components.
187
０５／０８／０２１５：０２：１２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１９１
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

storage areas:
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT＊ DOOR POCKET
Glove box
CENTER Door and seat-back pockets
POCKET Console compartment
Center pocket
Trunk, including the rear seats
when folded down
However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
SEAT-BACK POCKET＊ GLOVE BOX

TRUNK
＊: If equipped
188
０５／０８／０２１５：０２：２３３１ＳＶＡ６０００１９２
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits Steps for determining correct load 4. The resulting figure equals the
The maximum load for your vehicle limit: available amount of cargo and
is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. models luggage load capacity.
and 395 kg for Canadian models. 1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the For example, if the maximum load
This figure includes the total weight combined weight of occupants and is 850 lbs and there will be five 150
of all occupants, cargo, and cargo should never exceed 850 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
accessories. lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard. amount of available cargo and
[The placard is on the driver’s luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
doorjamb.] (850 − 750 (5 × 150) = 100 lbs.)
Before Driving
Overloading or improper 2. Determine the combined weight 5. Determine the combined weight
loading can affect handling and of the driver and passengers that of luggage and cargo being loaded
stability and cause a crash in will be riding in your vehicle. in the vehicle. That weight may
which you can be hurt or killed. not safely exceed the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity in
Follow all load limits and other the driver and passengers from step 4.
loading guidelines in this 850 pounds.
manual. In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all passengers, accessories,
and cargo must not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or
the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). Both are on a label on the
driver’s doorjamb.
189
０５／０８／０２１５：０２：３５３１ＳＶＡ６０００１９３
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger Carrying Cargo in the Trunk Cargo Net
Compartment Distribute cargo evenly on the Optional
Store or secure all items that could floor of the trunk, placing the The cargo net can be used to help
be thrown around and hurt heaviest items on the bottom and hold down items stored in the trunk.
someone during a crash. as far forward as possible.
Do not put any items on top of the If you fold down the back seat, tie
rear shelf. They can block your down items that could be thrown
view and be thrown around the about the vehicle during a crash or
vehicle during a crash. sudden stop.
Be sure items placed on the floor If you carry large items that
behind the front seats cannot roll prevent you from closing the trunk
under the seats and interfere with lid, exhaust gas can enter the
the driver’s ability to operate the passenger area. To avoid the
pedals, proper operation of the possibility of carbon monoxide
seats, and proper operation of the poisoning, follow the instructions
sensors under the seats. on page 50 .
Keep the glove box closed while

driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
190
０５／０８／０２１５：０２：４０３１ＳＶＡ６０００１９４
Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on Driving Guidelines ........................ 192

starting the engine under various Preparing to Drive ......................... 193
conditions, and how to operate the Starting the Engine........................ 194
manual and automatic transmissions. Manual Transmission.................... 195
It also includes important Automatic Transmission............... 198
information on parking your vehicle, Parking ............................................ 202
and the braking system. Braking System.............................. 203
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 204
Towing a Trailer ............................ 205
Driving
191
０５／０８／０２１５：０２：４７３１ＳＶＡ６０００１９５
Driving Guidelines
Si model Because of the low-profile tires

Your vehicle is designed to give you fitted to your vehicle, the alloy
optimum handling and performance wheels are closer to the ground.
on well-maintained roads. As part of Driving over a pothole or road
this design, your vehicle has a debris at too high a speed can
minimum of ground clearance and seriously damage a wheel. Slow
very low-profile tires. down under these conditions.
Use caution if you ever drive your

vehicle on very rough or rutted
roads. You could damage the
suspension and underbody by
bottoming out. Going too fast over
parking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ can Curbs and steep inclines could
also cause damage. damage the front and rear
bumpers. Low curbs that do not
affect the average vehicle may be
high enough to hit the bumper on
your vehicle. The front or rear
bumper may scrape when trying to
drive onto an incline, such as a
steep driveway or trailer ramps.
192
０５／０８／０２１５：０３：００３１ＳＶＡ６０００１９６
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 5. Check that any items you may be 10.Fasten your seat belt. Check that
and adjustments before you drive carrying are stored properly or your passengers have fastened
your vehicle. fastened down securely. their seat belts (see page 14 ).
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, 6. Check the seat adjustment (see 11.When you start the engine, check
and outside lights are clean and page 90 ). the gauges and indicators in the
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, instrument panel (see page 55 ).
or ice. 7. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
2. Check that the hood is fully closed. page 100 ).
3. Check that the trunk is fully 8. Check the steering wheel
Driving
closed. adjustment (see page 73 ).
4. Visually check the tires. If a tire 9. Make sure the doors are securely
looks low, use a gauge to check its closed and locked.
pressure (see page 241 ).
193
０５／０８／０２１５：０３：１２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１９７
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all The immobilizer system protects your The engine is harder to start in cold
electrical accessories to reduce vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly- weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
the drain on the battery. coded key (or other device) is used, the altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For meters) adds to this problem.
3. Manual Transmission: more inf ormation, see page 75 .
Push the clutch pedal down all the
way. The START (III) position 5. If the engine does not start within
does not function unless the clutch 15 seconds, or starts but stalls
pedal is pressed. right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
Automatic Transmission: down. If the engine starts, release
Make sure the shift lever is in pressure on the accelerator pedal
Park. Press on the brake pedal. so the engine does not race.
4. Without touching the accelerator 6. If the engine fails to start, press

pedal, turn the ignition key to the the accelerator pedal all the way
START (III) position. Do not hold down, and hold it there while
the key in the START (III) starting to clear flooding. If the
position for more than 15 seconds engine still does not start, return
at a time. If the engine does not to step 5.
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
194
０５／０８／０２１５：０３：２３３１ＳＶＡ６０００１９８
Manual Transmission
cause your clutch to wear out faster.
Come to a full stop before you shift

into reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into reverse, or shift into one
of the forward gears for a moment.
This stops the gears so they won’t
‘‘grind.’’
Driving
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX Si
The manual transmission is On vehicles with 6-speed manual On Si model

synchronized in all forward gears for transmission, the lockout system Note: The engine can be damaged if
smooth operation. It has a lockout so prevents you from shifting directly you inadvertently downshift into the
you cannot shift directly from fifth to from any forward gear to reverse wrong gear (for example, going from
reverse. while the vehicle is moving at a third gear at high rpms to second gear
certain speed (see page 197 ). instead of upshifting to fourth gear; the
engine speed limiter will not work in this
When shifting up or down, make situation).
sure you push the clutch pedal down
all the way, shift to the next gear,
and let the pedal up gradually. When
you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can CONTINUED
195
０５／０８／０２１５：０３：３２３１ＳＶＡ６０００１９９
Manual Transmission
When slowing down, you can get time on a hot day, be careful before With 6-speed manual transmission
extra braking from the engine by moving the shift lever. Because of
shifting to a lower gear. This extra the heat, the shift lever may be Shift up Normal acceleration
braking can help you maintain a safe extremely hot. If the outside
speed and prevent your brakes from temperature is low, the shift lever 1st to 2nd 17 mph (27 km/h)
overheating while going down a feels cold. 2nd to 3rd 29 mph (47 km/h)
steep hill. Before downshifting, 3rd to 4th 37 mph (60 km/h)
make sure the engine speed will not Recommended Shift Points 4th to 5th 43 mph (69 km/h)
go into the tachometer’s red zone in Drive in the highest gear that lets 5th to 6th 49 mph (79 km/h)
the lower gear. the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you good
fuel economy and effective
emissions control. The following
Rapid slowing or speeding-up shift points are recommended:
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash, With 5-speed manual transmission
you can be injured.
Shift up Normal acceleration
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces. 1st to 2nd 15 mph (24 km/h)
2nd to 3rd 27 mph (43 km/h)
3rd to 4th 39 mph (63 km/h)
On Si model 4th to 5th 53 mph (85 km/h)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
aluminum shift lever. If you leave the
vehicle parked outside for a long
196
０５／０８／０２１５：０３：４６３１ＳＶＡ６０００２００
Manual Transmission
Engine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout 2. If you are still unable to shift to
If you exceed the maximum speed 6-speed manual transmission reverse, apply the parking brake,
for the gear you are in, the engine The manual transmission has and turn the ignition key to the
speed will enter into the tachometer’s lockout so you cannot accidentally ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel shift from any forward gear to position.
the engine cut in and out. This is reverse while the vehicle is moving
caused by a limiter in the engine’s at a certain speed. If you cannot shift 3. Press the clutch pedal, and shift to
computer controls. The engine will to reverse when the vehicle is reverse.
run normally when you reduce the stopped:
rpm below the red zone. 4. With the clutch pedal still pressed,
start the engine.
Before downshifting, make sure the
Driving
engine will not go into the If you need to use this procedure to
tachometer’s red zone. shift to reverse, your vehicle may be
developing a problem. Have the
On Si model vehicle checked by your dealer.
Your vehicle has a rev limit indicator
to show you when the engine speed
is near the tachometer’s red zone
(see page 60 ).
1. With the clutch pedal pressed,

move the shift lever to the first/
second gear side of the neutral
gate, then shift to reverse.
197
０５／０８／０２１５：０３：５５３１ＳＶＡ６０００２０１
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a Shifting
few seconds when you turn the
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission. SHIFT LEVER
If the malfunction indicator lamp

comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem in the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and RELEASE
have the transmission checked by BUTTON
your dealer as soon as possible.
These indicators on the instrument To shift from any position, press
panel show which position the shift firmly on the brake pedal and press
lever is in. the release button on the front of the
shift lever. You cannot shift out of
Park when the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.
198
０５／０８／０２１５：０４：０６３１ＳＶＡ６０００２０２
To shift from: Do this: If you have done all of the above and Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
P to R Press the brake pedal, and still cannot move the lever out of need to restart a stalled engine, or if
press the shift lever release Park, see Shift Lock Release on it is necessary to stop briefly with
button. page 201 . the engine idling. Shift to the Park
R to P position if you need to leave your
N to R Press the shift lever release To avoid transmission damage, come vehicle for any reason. Press on the
D3 to 2 button. to a complete stop before shifting brake pedal when you are moving
2 to 1 into Park. You must also press the the shift lever from neutral to
1 to 2 release button to shift into Park. The another gear.
2 to D3 shift lever must be in Park before
D3 to D you can remove the key from the Drive (D) − Use this position for
D to N Move the shift lever. ignition switch. your normal driving. The
Driving
D to D3 transmission automatically selects a
N to D Reverse (R) − Press the brake suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
R to N pedal and press the release button speed and acceleration. You may
on the front of the shift lever to shift notice the transmission shifting up at
Park (P) − This position mechani- from Park to reverse. To shift from higher engine speeds when the
cally locks the transmission. Use reverse to neutral, come to a engine is cold. This helps the engine
Park whenever you are turning off or complete stop and then shift. Press warm up faster.
starting the engine. To shift out of the release button before shifting
Park, you must press on the brake into reverse from neutral.
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the front of the shift lever
to move it.
CONTINUED
199
０５／０８／０２１５：０４：１７３１ＳＶＡ６０００２０３
Drive (D3) −This position is similar First (1) − To shift from second to Engine Speed Limiter
to D, except only the first three first, press the release button on the If you exceed the maximum speed
gears are selected. Use D3 to provide front of the shift lever. This position for the gear you are in, the engine
engine braking when going down a locks the transmission in first gear. speed will enter into the tachometer’s
steep hill. D3 can also keep the By upshifting and downshifting red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
transmission from cycling between through 1, 2, D3, and D, you can the engine cut in and out. This is
third and fourth gears in stop-and-go operate the transmission much like a caused by a limiter in the engine’s
driving. manual transmission without a computer controls. The engine will
clutch pedal. run normally when you reduce the
Second (2) − To shift to second, rpm below the red zone.
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:

For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
200
０５／０８／０２１５：０４：２８３１ＳＶＡ６０００２０４
Shift Lock Release metal fingernail file, carefully pry 6. Remove the key from the shift
Do this if pushing on the brake pedal on the edge of the cover to remove lock release slot, then install the
and pressing the release button does it. cover. Make sure the notch on the
not shift the transmission out of cover is on the rear.
Park: RELEASE BUTTON Return the key to the ignition
switch, press the brake pedal, and
1. Set the parking brake. restart the engine.
2. Remove the key from the ignition If you need to use the shift lock
switch. release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
COVER checked by your dealer.
Driving
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
4. Insert the key in the shift lock

release slot.
5. Push down on the key while you

press the release button on the
shift lever and move the lever out
of Park to neutral.
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover. Using a
small flat-tipped screwdriver or a
201
０５／０８／０２１５：０４：４２３１ＳＶＡ６０００２０５
Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the moonroof (if the front wheels away from the
the parking brake is set firmly, or equipped) and the windows are curb. If you have a manual
your vehicle may roll if it is parked closed. transmission, put it in first gear.
on an incline.
Turn off the lights. If the vehicle is facing downhill,
If your vehicle has an automatic turn the front wheels toward the
transmission, set the parking brake Place any packages, valuables, etc., curb. If you have a manual
before you put the transmission in in the trunk or take them with you. transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the Lock the doors. Make sure the parking brake is
parking mechanism in the fully released before driving away.
transmission. On vehicles with security system Driving with the parking brake
Check the indicator on the partially set can overheat or
instrument panel to verify that the damage the rear brakes.
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall

grass, or other flammable Never install a sunshade between the
materials. The hot three way upper and lower meters on the
catalytic converter could cause instrument panel. If you do, you could
these materials to catch on fire. cause heat damage to the upper meter
on a very hot day.
202
０５／０８／０２１５：０４：５１３１ＳＶＡ６０００２０６
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with front Check the brakes after driving Brake Wear Indicators
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear through deep water. Apply the If the brake pads need replacing, you
wheels may be disc or drum, brakes moderately to see if they feel will hear a distinctive, metallic
depending on the model. A power normal. If not, apply them gently and screeching sound when you apply
assist helps reduce the effort needed frequently until they do. Be extra the brake pedal. If you do not have
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps cautious in your driving. the brake pads replaced, they will
you retain steering control when screech all the time. It is normal for
braking very hard. Braking System Design the brakes to occasionally squeal or
The hydraulic system that operates squeak when you apply them.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps the brakes has two separate circuits.
the brakes applied lightly, builds up Each circuit works diagonally across
heat, and reduces their effectiveness. the vehicle (the left-front brake is
Driving
It also keeps your brake lights on all connected with the right-rear brake,
the time, confusing drivers behind etc.). If one circuit should develop a
you. problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
203
０５／０８／０２１５：０５：０１３１ＳＶＡ６０００２０７
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake If the ABS indicator and the brake
helps prevent the brakes from pedal when the ABS activates, and system indicator come on together,
locking up, and helps you retain you may hear some noise. This is and the parking brake is fully
steering control by pumping the normal: it is the ABS rapidly released, the front-to-rear braking
brakes rapidly, much faster than a pumping the brakes. On dry distribution system may also be shut
person can do it. pavement, you will need to press on down.
the brake pedal very hard before the
The ABS also balances the front-to- ABS activates. However, you may Test your brakes as instructed on
rear braking distribution according feel the ABS activate immediately if page 265 . If the brakes feel normal,
to vehicle loading. you are trying to stop on snow or ice. drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
You should never pump the brake pedal. ABS Indicator possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
Let the ABS work for you by always which could cause the rear wheels to
keeping firm, steady pressure on the If this indicator comes on, the anti- lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
brake pedal. This is sometimes lock function of the braking system control.
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’ has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the indicator comes on while

driving, test the brakes as instructed
on page 265 .
204
０５／０８／０２１５：０５：０９３１ＳＶＡ６０００２０８
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS), Towing a Trailer
Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a Towing a Trailer
ABS does not reduce the time or longer distance to stop on loose or Your vehicle is not designed to tow a
distance it takes to stop the uneven surfaces, such as gravel or trailer; Attempting to do so can void
vehicle. It only helps with the snow, than a vehicle without anti- your warranties.
steering control during braking. lock. Slow down, and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
ABS will not prevent a skid that those conditions.
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
Driving
conditions.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of

stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
205
０５／０８／０２１５：０５：１２３１ＳＶＡ６０００２０９
Main Menu
206
０５／０８／０２１５：０５：１９３１ＳＶＡ６０００２１０
Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ....................... 208

important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder ..................... 209
maintained and how to follow basic Maintenance Record ..................... 216
maintenance safety precautions. Fluid Locations............................... 218
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 220
This section also includes Recommended Engine Oil........ 220
instructions on how to read the Synthetic Oil ............................... 221
maintenance minder messages in the Engine Oil Additives ................. 221
information display, a maintenance Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 222
record, and instructions for simple Engine Coolant ............................... 224
maintenance tasks you may want to Windshield Washers ..................... 227
take care of yourself. Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 228
Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 229
If you have the skills and tools to Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 230
Maintenance
perform more complex maintenance Power Steering Fluid ..................... 231
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Lights .............................................. 232
to purchase the service manual. See Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 237
page 291 for information on how to Floor Mats ...................................... 238
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 239
Wiper Blades .................................. 239
Tires ................................................ 241
Checking the Battery .................... 248
Vehicle Storage .............................. 250
207
０５／０８／０２１５：０５：３２３１ＳＶＡ６０００２１１
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Injury from moving parts. Do
section should be performed by a not run the engine unless
certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
mechanic. vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you can
To eliminate potential hazards, read be seriously hurt or killed. Failure to properly follow
the instructions before you begin, maintenance instructions and
and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection precautions can cause you to
and skills required. and maintenance be seriously hurt or killed.
Make sure your vehicle is parked recommendations and
on level ground, the parking brake schedules in this owner’s Always follow the procedures
is set, and the engine is off. manual. and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards
cleaner, not gasoline. Carbon Monoxide poison from Some of the most important safety
engine exhaust. Be sure there is precautions are given here. However,
To reduce the possibility of fire or adequate ventilation whenever you we cannot warn you of every
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, operate the engine. conceivable hazard that can arise in
and flames away from the battery performing maintenance. Only you
and all fuel-related parts. Burns from hot parts. Let the can decide whether or not you
engine and exhaust system cool should perform a given task.
Wear eye protection and before touching any parts.
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
208
０５／０８／０２１５：０５：４２３１ＳＶＡ６０００２１２
Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle displays engine oil life Engine Oil Life Indicator The remaining engine oil life is
and maintenance service items in the displayed on the information display
information display to show you INFORMATION DISPLAY according to this table:
when you should have your dealer
perform engine oil replacement and Calculated Engine Displayed
indicated maintenance service. Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life (%)
100 % − 91 % 100 %
Based on the engine operating 90 % − 81 % 90 %
conditions and accumulated engine 80 % − 71 % 80 %
revolutions, the onboard computer in 70 % − 61 % 70 %
your vehicle calculates the remaining 60 % − 51 % 60 %
engine oil life and displays it as a MAINTENANCE ENGINE OIL LIFE 50 % − 41 % 50 %
percentage. MINDER INDICATOR INDICATOR 40 % − 31 % 40 %
30 % − 21 % 30 %
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life, 20 % − 16 % 20 %
turn the ignition switch to the ON 15 % − 11 % ＊1 15 %
(II) position, then push and release 10 % − 6 % ＊1 10 %
the SEL/RESET button repeatedly 15 % − 6 % ＊2 15 %
until the engine oil life indicator 5%−1% 5%
appears (see page 64 ). 0% 0%
＊1: DX and Canadian DX-G

＊2: LX, EX, and Si
CONTINUED
209
０５／０８／０２１５：０５：５０３１ＳＶＡ６０００２１３
Maintenance Minder
The maintenance item code or codes

indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
SERVICE MESSAGE
(see page 215 ).
You can switch the display to the

odometer, the trip meter, and the
outside temperature indicator (if
equipped) by pushing the SEL/
RESET button on the dashboard
repeatedly.
MAINTENANCE ENGINE OIL LIFE
ITEM CODE(S) INDICATOR
If the oil life is 15 percent or less, When the remaining engine oil life is
you will see the oil life indicator less than 5 percent, you will see a
every time you turn the ignition ‘‘SERVICE’’ message on the
switch to the ON (II) position. The information display, along with the
maintenance minder indicator will same maintenance item code(s),
also come on, and the maintenance every time you turn the ignition
item code(s) for other scheduled switch to the ON (II) position.
maintenance items needing service
will be displayed next to the engine
oil life indicator.
210
０５／０８／０２１５：０５：５６３１ＳＶＡ６０００２１４
Maintenance Minder
When the displayed engine oil life is

0 percent or when negative mileage
is displayed, the maintenance minder
indicator remains on even if you
change the display to the odometer
and trip meter by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
NEGATIVE MILEAGE
Maintenance
When the remaining engine oil life is If you still do not perform the
0 percent, you will see the above indicated maintenance, you will see a
display. In this display, the remaining negative mileage, for example ‘‘−10,’’
oil life indicator will be blinking. This blinking in the display. This negative
display comes on and stays on every mileage means that you should have
time you turn the ignition switch to performed the indicated
the ON (II) position. When you see maintenance 10 miles ago.
this message, have the indicated Immediately have the indicated
maintenance performed by your maintenance done by your dealer.
dealer as soon as possible.
211
０５／０８／０２１５：０６：０６３１ＳＶＡ６０００２１５
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Items Indicator
Your dealer will reset the display
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM after completing the required ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
position.
If maintenance service is done by

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows: 3. Press the SEL/RESET button for
about 10 seconds. The engine oil
All maintenance items displayed in 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON life and the maintenance item
the information display are in code. (II) position. code(s) will blink.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 215 . 2. Press the SEL/RESET button
repeatedly until the engine oil life
indicator is displayed.
212
０５／０８／０２１５：０６：１６３１ＳＶＡ６０００２１６
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance However, service at a dealer is not

Precautions mandatory to keep your warranties
If you have the required service in effect. Maintenance may be done
done but do not reset the display, or by any qualified service facility or
reset the display without doing the person who is skilled in this type of
service, the system will not show the automotive service. Make sure to
proper maintenance intervals. This have the service facility or person
can lead to serious mechanical reset the display as previously
problems because you will no longer described. Keep all receipts as proof
have an accurate record of when of completion, and have the person
maintenance is needed. who does the work fill out the
maintenance record. Check your
Your authorized Honda dealer warranty booklet for more
4. Press the SEL/RESET button for knows your vehicle best and can information.
Maintenance
more than 5 seconds. The provide competent, efficient service.
maintenance item code(s) will We recommend using Honda parts
disappear, and the engine oil life and fluids whenever you have
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
CONTINUED
213
０５／０８／０２１５：０６：２７３１ＳＶＡ６０００２１７
Maintenance Minder
U.S. Vehicles: Owner’s Maintenance Checks Lights − Check the operation of

Maintenance, replacement, or You should check the following the headlights, parking lights,
repair of emissions control items at the specified intervals. If taillights, high-mount brake light,
devices and systems may be done you are unsure of how to perform and license plate lights monthly.
by any automotive repair any check, turn to the appropriate See page 232 .
establishment or individual using page listed.
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards. Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
According to state and federal page 183 .
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked Engine coolant level − Check the
with ＃ will not void your emissions radiator reserve tank every time
warranties. However, all you fill the fuel tank. See page 185 .
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the Automatic transmission − Check
intervals indicated by the the fluid level monthly. See page
information display. 228 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level

monthly. See page 230 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure

monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
241 .
214
０５／０８／０２１５：０６：３８３１ＳＶＡ６０００２１８
Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

A Replace engine oil＊ 1 Rotate tires
B Replace engine oil＊ and oil filter 2 Replace air cleaner element
Inspect front and rear brakes If you drive primarily in dusty conditions, replace
Check parking brake adjustment every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Visually inspect these items: Replace dust and pollen filter
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
Suspension components concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
Driveshaft boots from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
Brake hoses and line (including ABS) miles (24,000 km).
Maintenance Minder
All fluid levels and condition of fluids Inspect drive belt
Exhaust system＃ 3 Replace transmission fluid
Fuel lines and connections＃ 4 Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
＊: If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the 5 Replace engine coolant
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
＃: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column

on page 214 .
NOTE: Independent of the maintenance minder indicator in the information

display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
215
０５／０８／０２１５：０６：４６３１ＳＶＡ６０００２１９
Maintenance Record
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.
Mileage Maintenance Signature Mileage Maintenance Signature

Performed Performed
Date Date
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
216
０５／０８／０２１５：０６：５４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２２０
Maintenance Record
Mileage Maintenance Signature Mileage Maintenance Signature

Performed Performed
Date Date
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
Maintenance
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5
km km
217
０５／０８／０２１５：０６：５９３１ＳＶＡ６０００２２１
Fluid Locations
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, and EX models
ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID

FILL CAP ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK (Black cap)
(Orange handle)
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap) CLUTCH FLUID
(Manual
transmission only)
(Light gray cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap) AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
RADIATOR CAP
218
０５／０８／０２１５：０７：０４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２２２
Fluid Locations
Si model
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK BRAKE FLUID

(Orange handle) ENGINE OIL (Black cap)
FILL CAP
CLUTCH FLUID
(Light gray cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
RADIATOR CAP
219
０５／０８／０２１５：０７：１４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２２３
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX Si optimum engine protection.
Unscrew and remove the engine oil Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and API CERTIFICATION SEAL
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in tighten it securely. Wait a few
the oil slowly and carefully so you do minutes, and recheck the oil level on
not spill any. Clean up any spills the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
immediately. Spilled oil could above the upper mark; you could
damage components in the engine damage the engine.
compartment.
220
０５／０８／０２１５：０７：２５３１ＳＶＡ６０００２２４
Adding Engine Oil
Make sure the API Certification Seal Si model: Synthetic Oil

says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’ You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
The oil viscosity or weight is given for a conventional motor oil: it
provided on the container’s label. displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, and EX follow the oil and filter change
models: intervals shown on the information
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred display.
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year- Engine Oil Additives
round protection of your vehicle, to Ambient Temperature Your vehicle does not require any oil
improve cold weather starting and additives. Additives may adversely
fuel economy. affect the engine or transmission
Maintenance
An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 is performance and durability.
preferred for improved fuel economy
and year-round protection in your
vehicle. You may use a 10W-30 oil if
the temperature in your area never
goes below 20°F (−7°C).
Ambient Temperature
221
０５／０８／０２１５：０７：３４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２２５
Changing the Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter DRAIN BOLT WASHER DRAIN BOLT
according to the maintenance WASHER
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires

special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station- DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX Si
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and 1. Run the engine until it reaches 2. Open the hood, and remove the
proper equipment, you should have normal operating temperature, engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
this maintenance done by a skilled then shut it off. drain bolt and washer from the
mechanic. bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
222
０５／０８／０２１５：０７：４８３１ＳＶＡ６０００２２６
Changing the Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER 6. Refill the engine with the

recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX

3.9 US qt (3.7 )
Si
4.6 US qt (4.4 )
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX Si 7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the 4. Install a new oil filter according to indicator should go out within 5
Maintenance
remaining oil drain. A special the instructions that come with it. seconds. If it does not, turn off the
wrench (available from your engine, and check your work.
dealer) is required. Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting 8. Let the engine run for several
Make sure the oil filter gasket is surface of a new oil filter. minutes, then check the drain bolt
not stuck to the engine block. If it and oil filter for leaks.
is, remove it before installing a 5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
new oil filter. then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
CONTINUED
223
０５／０８／０２１５：０７：５８３１ＳＶＡ６０００２２７
Changing the Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant
9. Turn off the engine, let it sit for Adding Engine Coolant
several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary, RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK
add more oil.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be

harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX Si
or dump it on the ground.
If the coolant level in the reserve Always use Honda Long-life Anti-
tank is at or below the MIN line, add freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. is pre-mixed with 50 percent
Inspect the cooling system for leaks. antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
224
０５／０８／０２１５：０８：０８３１ＳＶＡ６０００２２８
Engine Coolant
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not

available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a Removing the radiator cap RADIATOR CAP
temporary replacement. Make sure it while the engine is hot can
is a high-quality coolant cause the coolant to spray out,
recommended for aluminum engines. seriously scalding you.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion, Always let the engine and
causing the cooling system to radiator cool down before
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling removing the radiator cap.
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible. DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
Maintenance
If the reserve tank is completely 1. Make sure the engine and radiator
empty, you should also check the are cool.
coolant level in the radiator.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
CONTINUED
225
０５／０８／０２１５：０８：１８３１ＳＶＡ６０００２２９
Engine Coolant
RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK
Si DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX Si
3. Remove the radiator cap by 4. The coolant level should be up to 6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
pushing down and turning the base of the filler neck. Add Fill it to halfway between the MAX
counterclockwise. coolant if it is low. and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any. Do not add any rust inhibitors or
Clean up any spill immediately; it other additives to your vehicle’s
could damage components in the cooling system. They may not be
engine compartment. compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
226
０５／０８／０２１５：０８：２８３１ＳＶＡ６０００２３０
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the LEVEL GAUGE When you refill the reservoir, clean
windshield washer reservoir at least the edges of the windshield wiper
monthly during normal use. blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
LEVEL GAUGE condition the blade edges.
Do not use engine antif reeze or a

vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
Si can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
On Canadian models: The low washer the windshield washer pump. Use only
Maintenance
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX level indicator comes on when the commercially-available windshield
level is low (see page 61 ). washer f luid.
Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
gauge. windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
227
０５／０８／０２１５：０８：３９３１ＳＶＡ６０００２３１
Automatic Transmission Fluid
DIPSTICK 5. If the level is below the lower

mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the upper mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully

so you do not spill any. Clean up
UPPER any spill immediately; it could
MARK damage components in the engine
LOWER compartment.
MARK
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). If
it’s not available, you may use a
Check the fluid level with the engine 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into DEXRON III automatic
at normal operating temperature. the transmission securely as transmission fluid as a temporary
shown in the illustration. replacement. However, continued
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. use can affect the shift quality.
Shut off the engine. 4. Remove the dipstick, and check Have the transmission flushed and
the fluid level. It should be refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 by
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) between the upper and lower your dealer as soon as it is
from the transmission, and wipe it marks. convenient.
with a clean cloth.
228
０５／０８／０２１５：０８：４９３１ＳＶＡ６０００２３２
Automatic Transmission Fluid, Manual Transmission Fluid
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back Manual Transmission Fluid
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration. FILLER BOLT FILLER BOLT
The automatic transmission should

be drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,

contact your dealer. Correct Level
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX Si Correct Level
Maintenance
Check the fluid level with the If Honda MTF is not available, you
transmission at normal operating may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
temperature and the vehicle sitting viscosity motor oil with the API
on level ground. Remove the Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
transmission filler bolt, and carefully GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
feel inside the bolt hole with your temporary replacement. However,
finger. The fluid level should be up motor oil does not contain the proper
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is additives, and continued use can
not, add Honda Manual cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it soon as it is convenient.
starts to run out of the hole. Reinstall
the filler bolt, and tighten it securely. CONTINUED
229
０５／０８／０２１５：０９：０１３１ＳＶＡ６０００２３３
Manual Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid
The manual transmission should be Brake Fluid MAX

drained and refilled with new fluid Check the brake fluid level in the
when this service is indicated by a reservoirs monthly.
information display. Replace the brake fluid according to
the time recommendations in the
If you are not sure how to check and maintenance minder schedule.
add fluid, contact your dealer.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
MIN
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement. The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can of the reservoir. If the level is at or
cause corrosion and decrease the life below the MIN mark, your brake
of the system. Have the brake system needs attention. Have the
system flushed and refilled with brake system inspected for leaks or
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid worn brake pads.
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not

compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
230
０５／０８／０２１５：０９：１４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２３４
Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Clutch Fluid Power Steering Fluid compartment.

Manual Transmission only
UPPER LEVEL
Always use Honda Power Steering
MAX Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can

indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
LOWER LEVEL the system inspected as soon as
MIN possible.
Maintenance
All models except Si
The fluid level should be between Check the level on the side of the
the MIN and MAX marks on the side reservoir when the engine is cold.
of the reservoir. If it is not, add The fluid should be between the Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
brake fluid to bring it up to that level. UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL. or right lock and holding it there can
Use the same fluid specified for the If not add power steering fluid to the damage the power steering pump.
brake system. UPPER LEVEL mark.
A low fluid level can indicate a leak Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
in the clutch system. Have this you do not spill any. Clean up any
system inspected as soon as possible. spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
231
０５／０８／０２１５：０９：２４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２３５
Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb High Beam Headlight

The headlights were properly aimed Your vehicle has halogen headlight
when your vehicle was new. If you bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle CLIP COOLANT
TUBE
regularly carry heavy items in the it by its base, and protect the glass
trunk, readjustment may be required. from contact with your skin or hard
Adjustment should be done by your objects. If you touch the glass, clean
dealer or other qualified mechanic. it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot

when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter. 1. Open the hood.
To change a bulb on the driver’s

side, remove the coolant tube from
the two clips, then remove the
reserve tank from its holder by
pulling it straight up.
232
０５／０８／０２１５：０９：３６３１ＳＶＡ６０００２３６
Lights
4. Insert the new bulb into the hole,

and turn it one-quarter turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
5. Push the electrical connector back

onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
6. Turn on the headlights to test the

BULB
new bulb.
7. (Driver’s side)
HOLDER TAB CONNECTOR Put the tube back in the clips and
install the reserve tank back in
Maintenance
2. Remove the electrical connector place, making sure its bottom tab
from the bulb by pushing on the is in the holder.
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the bulb.
3. Remove the bulb by turning it

about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
CONTINUED
233
０５／０８／０２１５：０９：４８３１ＳＶＡ６０００２３７
Lights
Low Beam Headlight 4. Remove the bulb from the

headlight assembly by turning it
SCREW one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,

and turn it one-quarter turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
6. Push the electrical connector back

onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
7. Turn on the headlights to test the

new bulb.
1. To change the driver’s side bulb, 2. Use a Phillips head screwdriver to
start the engine, turn the steering remove the screw from the inner 8. Reinstall the inner fender cover.
wheel all the way to the right, and fender, and pull the inner fender Then reinstall the screw and
turn off the engine. To change the cover back. tighten it securely.
passenger’s side bulb, turn the
steering wheel to the left. 3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the bulb.
234
０５／０８／０２１５：０９：５９３１ＳＶＡ６０００２３８
Lights
Replacing the Front Side Marker/ 4. Remove the bulb from the socket
Parking/Turn Signal Light Bulb by pushing the bulb in and turning
it counterclockwise until it unlocks.
5. Install the new bulb in the socket.

Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Insert the socket back into the

headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Turn on the lights to make sure

the new bulb is working.
Maintenance
8. Reinstall the inner fender cover.
1. To change the driver’s side bulb, 2. Use a Phillips head screwdriver to Then reinstall the screw and
start the engine, turn the steering remove the screw from the inner tighten it securely.
wheel all the way to the right, and fender, and pull the inner fender
turn off the engine. To change the cover back.
passenger’s side bulb, turn the
steering wheel to the left. 3. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
235
０５／０８／０２１５：１０：１１３１ＳＶＡ６０００２３９
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs 4. Pull the bulb straight out of its

socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
5. Reinstall the socket into the light

assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
6. Turn on the lights to make sure

7. Reinstall the trunk lining. Make

FASTENER sure it is installed under the edge
of the trunk seal.
1. Open the trunk. 2. Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight, back- 8. Put the fastener into the hole on
Remove the screw in the center of up light, side marker light, or turn the side of the trunk lining.
the fastener on the side of the signal light. Reinstall the screw.
trunk lining. Pull the lining back.
3. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
236
０５／０８／０２１５：１０：２４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２４０
Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts
Replacing a High-mount Brake Cleaning the Seat Belts

Light Bulb
On DX and LX models LOOP
1. Open the trunk, then remove the
holding clips from the cover, and
remove the cover.
2. Remove the socket from the light

assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
BULB
SOCKET
Maintenance
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its brush with a mixture of mild soap
socket. Push the new bulb straight and warm water to clean them. Do
into the socket until it bottoms. not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
4. Reinstall the socket. Turn it you use the vehicle.
clockwise until it locks. Make sure
5. Reinstall the cover, and tighten its

holding clips securely.
CONTINUED
237
０５／０８／０２１５：１０：３２３１ＳＶＡ６０００２４１
Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat Floor Mats If you use a non-Honda floor mat,
belt anchors can cause the belts to make sure it fits properly and that it
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of can be used with the floor mat
the loops with a clean cloth anchors. Do not put additional floor
dampened in mild soap and warm mats on top of the anchored mat.
water or isopropyl alcohol.
If equipped
The driver’s floor mat that came
with your vehicle hook over the floor
mat anchors. This keeps the floor
mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure

to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
238
０５／０８／０２１５：１０：４３３１ＳＶＡ６０００２４２
Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades
Dust and Pollen Filter Wiper Blades

On models with A/C Check the condition of the wiper
This filter removes the dust and blades at least every six months. Do not open the hood when the wiper
pollen that is brought in from the Replace them if you find signs of arms are raised, or you will damage the
outside through the heating and cracking in the rubber, areas that are hood and wiper arms.
cooling system. getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
Maintenance
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the heating and cooling system
becomes less than usual.
To replace a wiper blade:
1. Raise each wiper arm off the

windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
CONTINUED
239
０５／０８／０２１５：１０：５０３１ＳＶＡ６０００２４３
Wiper Blades
RELEASE TAB BLADE
HOLDER
RELEASE BUTTON COVER
2. Disconnect the blade assembly 3. Pull up the cover release tab on 4. Slide the blade out of the holder.
from the wiper arm by pushing in the end of the blade assembly,
the release button. Then slide the then remove the cover.
blade assembly out of the wiper
arm.
240
０５／０８／０２１５：１１：０３３１ＳＶＡ６０００２４４
Wiper Blades, Tires
5. Align the slots in the new blade Tires Inflation Guidelines

with the retaining edges on the To safely operate your vehicle, your Keeping the tires properly inflated
holder, then slide the blade onto tires must be the proper type and provides the best combination of
the holder. Keep about 1 inch of size, in good condition with adequate handling, tread life, and riding
the holder extended from the tread, and correctly inflated. comfort.
blade assembly so you can
reinstall the cover. The following pages give more Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
detailed information on how to take adversely affect handling and fuel
6. Reinstall the cover onto the blade care of your tires and what to do economy, and are more likely to
assembly. when they need to be replaced. fail from being overheated.
7. Slide the wiper blade assembly Overinflated tires can make your
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it vehicle ride more harshly, are
locks in place. Using tires that are excessively more prone to damage from road
Maintenance
worn or improperly inflated can hazards, and wear unevenly.
8. Lower the wiper arm down against cause a crash in which you can
the windshield, the passenger’s be seriously hurt or killed. We recommend that you visually
side first, then the driver’s side. check your tires every day. If you
Follow all instructions in this think a tire might be low, check it
owner’s manual regarding tire immediately with a tire gauge.
inflation and maintenance.
CONTINUED
241
０５／０８／０２１５：１１：１９３１ＳＶＡ６０００２４５
Tires
Use a gauge to measure the air If you check air pressures when the Recommended Tire Pressures
pressure in each tire at least once a tires are hot [driven for several miles The following charts show the
month. Even tires that are in good (kilometers)], you will see readings 4 recommended cold tire pressures for
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 most normal and high-speed driving
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per kgf/cm ) higher than the cold conditions.
month. Remember to check the readings. This is normal. Do not let
spare tire at the same time. air out to match the recommended DX and Canadian DX-G
cold air pressure. The tire will be Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
Check the air pressures when the underinflated. Front/Rear
tires are cold. This means the P195/65R15 89H 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 You should get your own tire kgf/cm )
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 pressure gauge and use it whenever
km). Add or release air, if needed, to you check your tire pressures. This LX, EX
match the recommended cold tire will make it easier for you to tell if a Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
pressures on this page. pressure loss is due to a tire problem Front/Rear
and not due to a variation between P205/55R16 89H 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2
gauges. kgf/cm )
While tubeless tires have some Si

ability to self-seal if they are Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
punctured, you should look closely P215/45R17 87V Front:
for punctures if a tire starts losing 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2
pressure. kgf/cm )
Rear:
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0
kgf/cm )
242
０５／０８／０２１５：１１：３２３１ＳＶＡ６０００２４６
Tires
Optional for Si Tire Inspection INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure Every time you check inflation, you
Front/Rear should also examine the tires for
215/45R17 91W 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 damage, foreign objects, and wear.
kgf/cm )
You should look for:
The compact spare tire pressure is: Bumps or bulges in the tread or
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb. of the tire. Replace the tire if you TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
can see fabric or cord.
For additional information about Your tires have wear indicators
Maintenance
your tires, see page 280 . Excessive tread wear. molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide across
the tread. This shows there is less
than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left
on the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little

traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
243
０５／０８／０２１５：１１：４４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２４７
Tires
Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation Tire Wear

In addition to proper inflation, On Si model only
correct wheel alignment helps to Front Front The tires that came on your vehicle
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire were designed and constructed to
is worn unevenly, have your dealer provide superior grip during
check the wheel alignment. acceleration, braking, and cornering.
Have your dealer check the tires if As a trade-off, they will wear more
you feel a consistent vibration while rapidly than tires used on ordinary
driving. A tire should always be passenger vehicles. Because of the
rebalanced if it is removed from the vehicle’s weight distribution, and the
wheel. When you have new tires (For Non-directional (For Directional fact that the front wheels are the
installed, make sure they are Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels) driving wheels, you can expect them
balanced. This increases riding to wear more rapidly than the rear
comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and tires.
have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate
balance. the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display. Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
For vehicles equipped with aluminum chart each time they are rotated. If
wheels: you purchase directional tires, rotate
Improper wheel weights can damage only front-to-back.
your vehicle’s wheels. Use only Honda
wheel weights f or balancing.
244
０５／０８／０２１５：１１：５６３１ＳＶＡ６０００２４８
Tires
The mileage you can expect from Replacing Tires and Wheels The ABS works by comparing the
your vehicle tires is the same as Replace your tires with radial tires of speed of the wheels. When replacing
comparable mid-and rear-engine the same size, load range, speed tires, use the same size originally
sports cars, and it will vary greatly rating, and maximum cold tire supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
with your driving habits. pressure rating (as shown on the and construction can affect wheel
tire’s sidewall). speed and may cause the system to
If you drive moderately, the front activate.
tires could last more than 10,000 Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
miles (16,000 km). However, the your vehicle can reduce braking If you ever replace a wheel, make
mileage will be substantially less if ability, traction, and steering sure the new one matches the
you tend to drive your vehicle at the accuracy. Using tires of a different specifications of the original.
upper limits of its capabilities. size or construction can cause the Replacement wheels are available at
ABS to work inconsistently. your dealer.
You should carefully inspect your
Maintenance
vehicle’s tires for wear, damage, and It is best to replace all four tires at
proper inflation every 7,500 miles the same time. If that is not possible
(12,000 km). or necessary, replace the two front Installing improper tires on your
tires or two rear tires as a pair. vehicle can affect handling and
Replacing just one tire can seriously stability. This can cause a crash
affect your vehicle’s handling. in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of

tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
245
０５／０８／０２１５：１２：０９３１ＳＶＡ６０００２４９
Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications Tires: Winter Driving

Wheels: DX and Canadian DX-G Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All
DX and Canadian DX-G P195/65R15 89H Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
15 x 6 J weather tread design suitable for
LX, EX most winter driving conditions.
LX, EX P205/55R16 89H
16 x 6 1/2 J For the best performance in snowy
Si or icy conditions, you should install
Si P215/45R17 87V snow tires or tire chains. They may
17 x 7 J (all season tire) be required by local laws under
215/45R17 91W certain conditions.
(summer tire)
Snow Tires
See page 280 for information about If you mount snow tires on your
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page vehicle, make sure they are radial
282 for tire size and labeling tires of the same size and load range
information. as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
246
０５／０８／０２１５：１２：１５３１ＳＶＡ６０００２５０
Tires
Tire Chains Si model

DX, Canadian DX-G, LX and EX models Because your vehicle has limited tire
Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, Honda strongly Traction devices that are the wrong
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’ recommends using the chains listed size or improperly installed can
cable-type traction devices, with below, made by Security Chain damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
rubber chain tensioners, on the front Company (SCC). suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
tires. Use traction devices only when driving if they are hitting any part of
required by driving conditions or CH2311T the vehicle.
local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires. Metal link-
type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.
When installing cables, follow the

manufacturer’s instructions, and
Maintenance
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
247
０５／０８／０２１５：１２：２４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２５１
Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOW If additional battery maintenance is

needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
WARNING: Battery posts,

terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX Si
Check the condition of the battery Check the terminals for corrosion (a
monthly by looking at the test white or yellowish powder). To
indicator window. The label on the remove it, cover the terminals with a
battery explains the test indicator’s solution of baking soda and water. It
colors. will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
further corrosion.
248
０５／０８／０２１５：１２：３１３１ＳＶＡ６０００２５２
Checking the Battery
If you need to connect the battery to If your vehicle’s battery is

a charger, disconnect both cables to disconnected or goes dead, the audio
prevent damaging your vehicle’s system will disable itself. The next
electrical system. Always disconnect time you turn on the radio you will
the negative (−) cable first, and see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
reconnect it last. frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the code (see page
172 ).
The battery gives off explosive On vehicles with navigation system

hydrogen gas during normal The navigation system will also
operation. disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
A spark or flame can cause the will require you to enter a PIN
Maintenance
battery to explode with enough before it can be used. Refer to the
force to kill or seriously hurt you. navigation system manual.
Wear protective clothing and a

face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
249
０５／０８／０２１５：１２：４４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２５３
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for Block the rear wheels. Cover the vehicle with a
an extended period (more than 1 ‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
month), there are several things you If the vehicle is to be stored for a from a porous material such as
should do to prepare it for storage. longer period, it should be cotton. Non-porous materials, such
Proper preparation helps prevent supported on jackstands so the as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
deterioration and makes it easier to tires are off the ground. which can damage the paint.
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if If possible, periodically run the
the vehicle is being stored engine until it reaches full
Fill the fuel tank. indoors). operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
Change the engine oil and filter. Disconnect the battery. twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Wash and dry the exterior Support the front wiper blade
completely. arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are To minimize sticking, apply a
completely dry. silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
Leave the parking brake off. Put vehicle body wax to the painted
the transmission in reverse surfaces that mate with the door
(manual) or Park (automatic). and trunk seals.
250
０５／０８／０２１５：１２：４９３１ＳＶＡ６０００２５４
Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire....................... 252

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 253
experience with their vehicles. It If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 257
gives you information about how to Jump Starting ................................. 259
safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Overheats ............... 261
to do to correct it. If the problem has Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 263
stranded you on the side of the road, Charging System Indicator........... 263
you may be able to get going again. Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 264
If not, you will also find instructions Brake System Indicator ................ 265
on getting your vehicle towed. Fuses ............................................... 266
Fuse Locations ............................... 270
Emergency Towing ....................... 272

251
０５／０８／０２１５：１３：０１３１ＳＶＡ６０００２５５
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a Do not mount tire chains on the INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get compact spare tire.
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as Do not use your compact spare
soon as you can. tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you On Si model
check the other tires. It should be Do not use a compact spare tire
inflated to: mounted on a front wheel; it will
damage the limited slip differential
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) (see page 253 ). TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
Follow these precautions: Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
This tire gives a harsher ride and same wheel. The spare tire is not
less traction on some road sur- designed to be mounted on a regular
faces. Use greater caution while wheel, and the spare wheel is not
driving. designed for mounting a regular tire.
252
０５／０８／０２１５：１３：１４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２５６
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving, JACK TOOL CASE

stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until The vehicle can easily roll off
you get to an exit or an area that is the jack, seriously injuring
far away from the traffic lanes. anyone underneath.
The compact spare tire is smaller Follow the directions for

than a standard tire, and it will affect changing a tire exactly, and
the vehicle’s handling. Drive never get under the vehicle
cautiously when the spare is when it is supported only by the
mounted on your vehicle. jack.
TRUNK FLOOR SPARE TIRE
On Si model only
The size difference may also cause 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and 3. Open the trunk. Raise the trunk
damage to the differential, so do not non-slippery ground. Put the floor by lifting up on the back edge.
mount the compact spare on the transmission in Park (automatic)

front. If either front tire goes flat, or reverse (manual). Apply the 4. Take the tool kit case out of the
remove the rear tire on that same parking brake. trunk.
side, mount the compact spare tire
on the rear, then mount the rear tire 2. Turn on the hazard warning lights, 5. Unscrew the wing bolt, and take
on the front. and turn the ignition switch to the the spare tire out of its well.
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
CONTINUED
253
０５／０８／０２１５：１３：２４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２５７
JACKING POINTS
WHEEL NUT WRENCH WHEEL NUT WRENCH EXTENSION
6. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn 7. Place the jack under the jacking 8. Use the extension and the wheel
with the wheel nut wrench. point nearest the tire you need to nut wrench as shown to raise the
change. Turn the end bracket vehicle until the flat tire is off the
clockwise until the top of the jack ground.
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is 9. Remove the wheel nuts, then
resting in the jack notch. remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
254
０５／０８／０２１５：１３：３４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２５８
WHEEL NUTS
WHEEL NUTS WHEEL COVER BRAKE HUB
DX, Canadian DX-G , and LX models 10.Before mounting the spare tire, 11.Put on the spare tire. Put the
Do not attempt to forcibly pry the wipe any dirt off the mounting wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
wheel cover off with a screwdriver surface of the wheel and hub with then tighten them in a crisscross

or other tool. The wheel cover a clean cloth. Wipe the hub pattern with the wheel nut wrench
cannot be removed without first carefully; it may be hot from until the wheel is firmly against
removing the wheel nuts. driving. the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
12.Lower the vehicle to the ground,

and remove the jack.
CONTINUED
255
０５／０８／０２１５：１３：４４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２５９
SPACER CONE WING BOLT
For For normal

compact tire
spare tire
13.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in 14. On EX and Si models in the U.S., and 15.Place the flat tire face down in the
the same crisscross pattern. Have LX, EX, and Si models in Canada spare tire well.
the wheel nut torque checked at Remove the center cap from the
the nearest automotive service flat tire. 16.Remove the spacer cone from the
facility. wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m) 17.Secure the flat tire by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
256
０５／０８／０２１５：１３：５８３１ＳＶＡ６０００２６０
Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start
18. Store the jack and tools in the tool If the Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the Starter
kit case. Place the tool kit case in Diagnosing why the engine won’t Motor Operates Very Slowly
the center of the flat tire. start falls into two areas, depending When you turn the ignition switch to
on what you hear when you turn the the START (III) position, you do not
ignition switch to the START (III) hear the normal noise of the engine
position: trying to start. You may hear a
Loose items can fly around the clicking sound or series of clicks, or
interior in a crash and could You hear nothing, or almost nothing at all.
seriously injure the occupants. nothing. The engine’s starter Check these things:
motor does not operate at all, or
Store the wheel, jack, and tools operates very slowly. Check the transmission interlock.
securely before driving. If you have a manual transmission,
You can hear the starter motor the clutch pedal must be pushed
operating normally, or the starter all the way to the floor or the
19. Store the wheel cover or center motor sounds like it is spinning starter will not operate. With an
cap in the trunk. Make sure it does faster than normal, but the engine automatic transmission, it must be

not get scratched or damaged. does not start up and run. in Park or neutral.
20. Lower the trunk floor, then close Turn the ignition switch to the ON
the trunk lid. (II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 259 .
CONTINUED
257
０５／０８／０２１５：１４：０９３１ＳＶＡ６０００２６１
If the Engine Won’t Start
Turn the ignition switch to the The Starter Operates Normally Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
START (III) position. If the In this case, the starter motor’s gauge; the low fuel indicator may
headlights do not dim, check the speed sounds normal, or even faster not be working.
condition of the fuses. If the fuses than normal, when you turn the
are OK, there is probably ignition switch to the START (III) There may be an electrical
something wrong with the position, but the engine does not run. problem, such as no power to the
electrical circuit for the ignition fuel pump. Check all the fuses
switch or starter motor. You will Are you using a properly coded (see page 266 ).
need a qualified technician to key? An improperly coded key will
determine the problem (see cause the immobilizer system If you find nothing wrong, you will
Emergency Towing on page 272 ). indicator in the instrument panel need a qualified technician to find
to blink rapidly (see page 75 ). the problem. See Emergency
If the headlights dim noticeably or Towing on page 272 .
go out when you try to start the Are you using the proper starting
engine, either the battery is dis- procedure? Refer to Starting the
charged or the connections are Engine on page 194 .
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connec-
tions (see page 248 ). You can
then try jump starting the vehicle
from a booster battery (see page
259 ).
258
０５／０８／０２１５：１４：２１３１ＳＶＡ６０００２６２
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple To jump start your vehicle: DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX
procedure, you should take several 1. Open the hood, and check the
precautions. physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
A battery can explode if you do jump starting until it thaws.
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
Keep all sparks, open flames, electrolyte inside can f reeze. BOOSTER BATTERY
and smoking materials away Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
from the battery. battery can cause it to rupture. The numbers in the illustrations
show you the order to connect the
2. Turn off all the electrical jumper cables.

You cannot start your vehicle with an accessories: heater, A/C, audio
automatic transmission by pushing system, lights, etc. Put the
or pulling it. transmission in neutral (M/T) or
Park (A/T), and set the parking
brake.
CONTINUED
259
０５／０８／０２１５：１４：３１３１ＳＶＡ６０００２６３
Jump Starting
Si DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX Si
BOOSTER BATTERY
3. Connect one jumper cable to the 4. Connect the second jumper cable 6. Start the vehicle. If the starter
positive (＋) terminal on your to the negative (−) terminal on motor still operates slowly, check
battery. Connect the other end to the booster battery. Connect the that the jumper cables have good
the positive (＋) terminal on the other end to the grounding strap metal-to-metal contact.
booster battery. as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
5. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
260
０５／０８／０２１５：１４：４２３１ＳＶＡ６０００２６４
Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats
7. Once your vehicle is running, If the Engine Overheats

disconnect the negative cable from The pointer of the vehicle’s
your vehicle, then from the temperature gauge should stay in Steam and spray from an
booster battery. Disconnect the the midrange. If it climbs to the red overheated engine can
positive cable from your vehicle, mark, you should determine the seriously scald you.
then from the booster battery. reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.). Do not open the hood if steam
Keep the ends of the jumper cables is coming out.
away from each other and any metal If the vehicle overheats, you
on the vehicle until everything is should take immediate action. The
disconnected. Otherwise, you may only indication may be the 1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
cause an electrical short. temperature gauge climbing to or Put the transmission in neutral
above the red mark. Or you may (M/T) or Park (A/T), and set the
see steam or spray coming from parking brake. Turn off all
under the hood. accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators.

2. If you see steam and/or spray
Driving with the temperature gauge coming from under the hood, turn
pointer at the red mark can cause off the engine. Wait until you see
serious damage to the engine. no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
CONTINUED
261
０５／０８／０２１５：１４：５４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２６５
If the Engine Overheats
3. If you do not see steam or spray, 7. If there was no coolant in the 9. Start the engine, and set the
leave the engine running, and reserve tank, you may need to add temperature control dial to
watch the temperature gauge. If coolant to the radiator. Let the maximum heat. Add coolant to the
the high heat is due to overloading, engine cool down until the reading radiator up to the base of the filler
the engine should start to cool reaches the middle of the neck. If you do not have the
down almost immediately. If it temperature gauge or lower proper coolant mixture available,
does, wait until the temperature before checking the radiator. you can add plain water.
gauge comes down to the midpoint, Remember to have the cooling
then continue driving. system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
4. If the temperature gauge stays at Removing the radiator cap can.
the red mark, turn off the engine. while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out, 10.Put the radiator cap back on
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, seriously scalding you. tightly. Run the engine, and watch
such as a split radiator hose. the temperature gauge. If it goes
Everything is still extremely hot, Always let the engine and back to the red mark, the engine
so use caution. If you find a leak, it radiator cool down before needs repair (see Emergency
must be repaired before you removing the radiator cap. Towing on page 272 ).
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 272 ). 8. Using gloves or a large heavy 11.If the temperature stays normal,
cloth, turn the radiator cap check the coolant level in the
6. If you don’t find an obvious leak, counterclockwise, without pushing radiator reserve tank. If it has
check the coolant level in the down, to the first stop. After the gone down, add coolant to the
radiator reserve tank (see page pressure releases, push down on MAX mark. Put the cap back on
185 ). Add coolant if the level is the cap, and turn it until it comes tightly.
below the MIN mark. off.
262
０５／０８／０２１５：１５：０８３１ＳＶＡ６０００２６６
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut Charging System Indicator
This indicator should never off the engine. Turn on the hazard If the charging system
come on when the engine is warning indicators. indicator comes on brightly
running. If it starts flashing or stays when the engine is running, the
on, the oil pressure has dropped very 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. battery is not being charged.
low or lost pressure. Serious engine Open the hood, and check the oil
damage is possible, and you should level (see page 183 ). An engine Immediately turn off all electrical
take immediate action. very low on oil can lose pressure accessories. Try not to use other
during cornering and other driving electrically operated controls such as
maneuvers. the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
Running the engine with low oil 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the discharge the battery rapidly.
pressure can cause serious mechanical level back to the full mark on the
damage almost immediately. Turn of f dipstick (see page 220 ). Go to a service station or garage
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get where you can get technical
the vehicle stopped. 4. Start the engine, and watch the oil assistance.

pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
272 ).
263
０５／０８／０２１５：１５：１８３１ＳＶＡ６０００２６７
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If the indicator comes on If the indicator comes on repeatedly, If your vehicle battery has been
while driving, it means one even though it may turn off as you disconnected or gone dead, these
of the engine’s emissions control continue driving, have the vehicle codes are erased. It can take several
systems may have a problem. Even checked by your dealer as soon as days of driving under various
though you may feel no difference in possible. conditions to set the codes again.
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause To check if they are set, turn the
increased emissions. Continued ignition switch to the ON (II)
operation may cause serious damage. If you keep driving with the position, without starting the engine.
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can The malfunction indicator lamp will
If you have recently refueled your damage your vehicle’s emissions come on for 20 seconds. If it then
vehicle, the indicator coming on controls and engine. Those repairs may goes off, the readiness codes are set.
could be due to a loose or missing not be covered by your vehicle’s If it blinks five times, the readiness
fuel fill cap. You will also see a warranties. codes are not set. If possible, do not
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on take your vehicle for a state
the information display. Tighten the This indicator may also come on with emissions test until the readiness
cap until it clicks at least once (see the ‘‘D’’ indicator. codes are set. Refer to State
page 181 ). Tightening the cap will Emissions Testing for more
not turn the indicator off Readiness Codes information (see page 286 ).
immediately; it can take several days Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
of normal driving. codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
264
０５／０８／０２１５：１５：２６３１ＳＶＡ６０００２６８
Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada The brake system However, if the brake pedal does not If the ABS indicator comes on with
indicator normally feel normal, you should take the brake system indicator, have
comes on when immediate action. A problem in one your vehicle inspected by your
you turn the ignition switch to the part of the system’s dual circuit dealer immediately.
ON (II) position and as a reminder to design will still give you braking at
check the parking brake. It will stay two wheels. You will feel the brake
on if you do not fully release the pedal go down much farther before
parking brake. the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
If the brake system indicator comes pedal.
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the Slow down by shifting to a lower
brake pedal to see if it feels normal. gear, and pull to the side of the road
If it does, check the brake fluid level when it is safe. Because of the long
the next time you stop at a service distance needed to stop, it is
station (see page 230 ). hazardous to drive the vehicle. You

should have it towed and repaired as
If the fluid level is low, take your soon as possible (see Emergency
vehicle to a dealer, and have the Towing on page 272 ).
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads. If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
265
０５／０８／０２１５：１５：３６３１ＳＶＡ６０００２６９
Fuses
INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD Checking and Replacing Fuses

If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, check for a
blown fuse first. Determine from the
chart on pages 270 and 271 , or the
diagram on the fuse box lid, which
fuse or fuses control that device.
Check those fuses first, but check all
TAB the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device
works.
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in The under-hood fuse box is in the
two fuse boxes. engine compartment on the driver’s
side, next to the brake fluid reservoir.
The interior fuse box is on the To open it, push the tabs as shown.
driver’s lower left side.
266
０５／０８／０２１５：１５：４６３１ＳＶＡ６０００２７０
Fuses
FUSE BLOWN FUSE BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
1. Turn the ignition switch to the 3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check the smaller fuses in the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the the under-hood fuse box by under-hood fuse box and all the
headlights and all other looking through the top at the wire fuses in the interior fuse box by

accessories are off. inside. Removing these fuses pulling out each one with the fuse
requires a Phillips-head screw- puller provided on the back of the
2. Remove the cover from the fuse driver. under-hood fuse box cover.
box.
CONTINUED
267
０５／０８／０２１５：１５：５４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２７１
Fuses
If you cannot drive the vehicle

BLOWN without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse Replacing a f use with one that has a
of the same rating or a lower rating higher rating greatly increases the
from one of the other circuits. Make chances of damaging the electrical
sure you can do without that circuit system. If you do not have a
temporarily (such as the accessory replacement f use with the proper rating
power socket or radio). f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it 6. If the replacement fuse of the
might blow out again. This does not same rating blows in a short time,
indicate anything wrong. Replace the there is probably a serious
5. Look for a blown wire inside the fuse with one of the correct rating as electrical problem in your vehicle.
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with soon as you can. Leave the blown fuse in that
one of the spare fuses of the same circuit and have your vehicle
rating or lower. checked by a qualified mechanic.
268
０５／０８／０２１５：１６：０１３１ＳＶＡ６０００２７２
Fuses
All models except DX

If the driver’s power window fuse is
removed, the AUTO function of the
driver’s window will be disabled. You
should reset the AUTO feature, (see
page 97 ).
If the radio fuse is removed, the

audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio you
will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the digit code (see
page 172 ).
When the audio system is disabled,

the clock setting in the audio system
will be canceled. You will need to
reset the clock (see page 173 ).
269
０５／０８／０２１５：１６：１０３１ＳＶＡ６０００２７３
Fuse Locations
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected
6 20 A Fan Moter
7 30 A Main Fan Moter (A/T)
20 A Main Fan Moter (M/T)
8 40 A Rear Defroster
9 40 A Blower
10 10 A Hazard
11 15 A FI
12 15 A Stop, Horn
13 − Not Used
14 − Not Used
15 7.5 A Oil Level Sensor
16 − Not Used
17 − Not Used
No. Amps. Circuits Protected 18 15 A Ignition Coil
19 15 A FI Main
1 100 A Main Fuse 20 7.5 A MG Clutch
70 A EPS＊ 21 15 A DBW
2 80 A Option 22 7.5 A Interior Light
50 A Ignition Switch Main 23 10 A Back Up
3 30 A ABS Motor
＊
30 A ABS F/S : Si model
4 50 A Headlight Main
40 A Power Window Main
5 − Not Used
270
０５／０８／０２１５：１６：２２３１ＳＶＡ６０００２７４
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected
17 10 A Left Headlight Low Beam

18 20 A Headlight High Beam Main
19 15 A Small Lights Main
20 − Not Used
21 20 A Headlight Low Beam Main
22 − Not Used
23 − Not Used
24 20 A Moonroof ＊
25 20 A Door Lock
26 20 A Driver’s Power Window
27 20 A HAC Option
28 15 A Rear Accessory Socket＊
No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 29 15 A Accessory

30 20 A Front Passenger’s Power
1 7.5 A Power Window 9 7.5 A ODS (Occupant Detection Window
2 15 A Fuel Pump System) 31 − Not Used
3 10 A IG1 ACG 10 7.5 A Meter 32 − Not Used
4 7.5 A ABS 11 10 A SRS 33 − Not Used
5 15 A Audio Amp＊ 12 10 A Right Headlight High Beam 34 − Not Used
6 20 A Front Fog Lights＊ 13 10 A Left Headlight High Beam 35 7.5 A Accessory, Radio
7 − Not Used 14 7.5 A Small Lights (Interior) 36 10 A IG2 HAC
8 − Not Used 15 7.5 A Small Lights (Exterior) 37 7.5 A Daytime Running Lights
16 10 A Right Headlight Low Beam 38 30 A Front Wiper
＊
: If equipped
271
０５／０８／０２１５：１６：３９３１ＳＶＡ６０００２７５
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, If, due to damage, your vehicle must
call a professional towing service or be towed with the front wheels on
organization. Never tow your vehicle the ground, do this: Improper towing preparation will
with just a rope or chain. It is very damage the transmission. Follow the
dangerous. Manual Transmission: above procedure exactly. If you cannot
Release the parking brake. shif t the transmission or start the
There are two ways to tow your Shift the transmission to neutral. engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle: Leave the ignition switch in the vehicle must be transported with the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the f ront wheels of f the ground.
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator steering wheel does not lock.
loads your vehicle on the back of a With the front wheels on the ground,
truck. This is the best way to trans- Automatic Transmission: do not tow the vehicle more than 50
port your vehicle. Release the parking brake. miles (80 km), and keep the speed
Start the engine. below 35 mph (55 km/h).
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow Shift to D, then to N.
truck uses two pivoting arms that go Turn off the engine. Do not tie down the vehicle at an
under the front tires and lift them off Leave the ignition switch in the angle that would allow the towing
the ground. The rear tires remain on ACCESSORY (I) position so the cables to contact the vehicle’s front
the ground. This is an acceptable steering wheel does not lock. bumper. To avoid possible damage,
way to tow your vehicle. protect the front bumper with tape.
If your vehicle is equipped with a

front spoiler, remove it before
towing so it is not damaged.
272
０５／０８／０２１５：１６：４４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２７６
Emergency Towing
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the The steering system can be damaged if
bumpers will cause serious damage. the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
The bumpers are not designed to ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
support the vehicle’s weight. position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.

273
０５／０８／０２１５：１６：４７３１ＳＶＡ６０００２７７
Main Menu
274
０５／０８／０２１５：１６：５１３１ＳＶＡ６０００２７８
Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 276 Emissions Controls........................ 283
you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 278 The Clean Air Act ...................... 283
your vehicle, and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading Crankcase Emissions Control
identification numbers. It also (U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 280 System..................................... 283
includes information you should Uniform Tire Quality Evaporative Emissions Control
know about your vehicle’s tires and Grading ................................... 280 System..................................... 283
emissions control systems. Treadwear .................................. 280 Onboard Refueling Vapor
Traction....................................... 280 Recovery ................................. 283
Temperature .............................. 281 Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 284
Tire Labeling .................................. 282 PGM-FI System ..................... 284
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 284
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR)System ..................... 284
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 284
Replacement Parts..................... 284
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 285
State Emissions Testing ............... 286
275
０５／０８／０２１５：１６：５８３１ＳＶＡ６０００２７９
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers located in various places.
The vehicle identification number LID

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
To access the VIN in the engine

compartment, slide the lid on the
back of the engine compartment.
Make sure to close the lid before
closing the hood. CERTIFICATION LABEL
276
０５／０８／０２１５：１７：０４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２８０
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into

the engine block. It is on the front. DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, and EX
The transmission number is on a

label on top of the transmission. ENGINE NUMBER
AUTOMATIC/MANUAL
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Si
ENGINE NUMBER
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NUMBER
277
０５／０８／０２１５：１７：２８３１ＳＶＡ６０００２８１
Specifications
Dimensions Capacities
Length 174.8 in (4,440 mm) Fuel tank Approx. 13.2 US gal (50 )
Width 68.9 in (1,751 mm) Change＊1 A/T 1.45 US gal (5.5 )＊3
Height 55.0 in (1,396 mm) Engine M/T 1.37 US gal (5.2 )＊3
Wheelbase 104.3 in (2,650 mm) coolant 1.19 US gal (4.5 )＊4
Track Front 59.0 in (1,499 mm) Total A/T 1.88 US gal (7.1 )＊3
Rear 60.1 in (1,526 mm) M/T 1.72 US gal (6.5 )＊3
1.80 US gal (6.8 )＊4
Weights Engine oil Change＊2
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached Including 3.9 US qt (3.7 )＊3
to the driver’s doorjamb. filter 4.6 US qt (4.4 )＊4
Without filter 3.7 US qt (3.5 )＊3
Engine 4.4 US qt (4.2 )＊4
Type Water cooled 4-stroke Total 4.8 US qt (4.5 )＊3
SOHC VTEC＊1, DOHC i-VTEC＊2 5.8 US qt (5.5 )＊4
4-cylinder gasoline engine Manual trans- Change 1.5 US qt (1.4 )＊3
Bore x Stroke 3.19 x 3.44 in (81.0 x 87.3 mm) mission fluid 1.6 US qt (1.5 )＊4
＊3
3.39 x 3.39 in (86 x 86 mm) Total 1.7 US qt (1.6 )
＊4
Displacement 110 cu-in (1,799 cm ) ＊1 1.8 US qt (1.7 )
122 cu-in (1,998 cm ) ＊2 Automatic Change 2.5 US qt (2.4 )
Compression ratio 10.5 ＊1 transmission Total 6.2 US qt (5.9 )
11.0 ＊2 fluid
Spark plugs＊1 NGK: IZFR6K-11S Windshield U.S. Vehicles 2.6 US qt (2.5 )
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11S washer Canada 4.8 US qt (4.5 )
Spark plugs＊2 NGK: IFR7G-11KS reservoir Vehicles
DENSO: SK22PR-M11S ＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in
＊1 : DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX the engine
＊2 : Si Reserve tank capacity: 0.11 US gal (0.4 )
＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
＊3 : U.S.: DX, LX, EX Canada: DX, DX-G, LX, EX
＊4 : Si
278
０５／０８／０２１５：１７：５４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２８２
Specifications
Air Conditioning Fuses

Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) Interior See page 271 or the fuse label
Charge quantity 14.1−15.9 oz (400−450 g) attached to the dashboard.
Lubricant oil type SP-10 Under-hood See page 270 or the fuse box
cover.
Lights
Headlights (HI) 12 V − 60 W (HB3) Alignment
Headlights (LO) 12 V − 51 W (HB4) Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Front turn signal/Side marker/ 12 V − 28/8 W Rear 0.08 in (2.0 mm)
Parking light Camber Front 0°
Rear turn signal lights 12 V − 21 W Rear −1°30’
Stop/Taillights 12 V − 21/5 W Caster Front 7°
Rear side marker lights 12 V − 3 CP
Back-up lights 12 V − 18 W Tires
High-mount brake light＊ 12 V − 21 W Size Front/Rear P195/65R15 89H ＊1
License plate lights 12 V − 3 CP P205/55R16 89H ＊2
Ceiling light 12 V − 8W P215/45R17 87V ＊3
Spotlights 12 V − 8W 215/45R17 91W ＊5
Trunk light 12 V − 5W Spare T125/70D15 95M ＊4
T125/70D16 96M ＊6
＊ : All models except for EX and Si Pressure Front/Rear 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )＊1
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )＊2, ＊5
Battery Front＊3 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Capacity 12 V − 36 AH/5 HR ＊1 Rear＊3 29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
12 V − 38 AH/5 HR ＊2 Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
12 V − 45 AH/20 HR ＊1 ＊1 : U.S. DX, Canada DX, DX-G
12 V − 47 AH/20 HR ＊3 ＊2 : LX,EX
＊3 : Si (all season tires)
＊1 : U.S.: DX, LX, EX ＊4 : U.S.: DX, LX, EX, Canada: DX, DX-G, LX, EX
＊2 : Canada: DX, DX-G,LX, EX ＊5 : Optional for Si (summer tires)
＊3 : Si ＊6 : Si
279
０５／０８／０２１５：１８：０５３１ＳＶＡ６０００２８３
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction − AA, A, B, C

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to
performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
(DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between the tread shoulder and the depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices, and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
280
０５／０８／０２１５：１８：１１３１ＳＶＡ６０００２８４
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature − A, B, C Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not
tire’s resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed,
heat, and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading,
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance that all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
281
０５／０８／０２１５：１８：３０３１ＳＶＡ６０００２８５
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle 16 − Rim diameter in inches. FW6X − Tire type code.
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described 89 − Load index (a numerical code 2202 − Date of manufacture.
below. associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry). Maximum Tire Pressure
Tire Size Max Press − The maximum air
Whenever tires are replaced, they H − Speed symbol (an pressure the tire can hold.
should be replaced with tires of the alphabetical code indicating
same size. Below is an example of the maximum speed rating). Maximum Tire Load
tire size with an explanation of what Max Load − The maximum load the
each component means. Tire Identification Number tire can carry at maximum air
The tire identification number (TIN) pressure.
P205/55R16 89H is a group of numbers and letters
that look like this example:
P − Vehicle type (P indicates DOT B97R FW6X 2202
passenger vehicle).
DOT − This indicates that the tire
205 −Tire width in millimeters. meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
55 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section Transportation.
height as a percentage of its
width). B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
R − Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
282
０５／０８／０２１５：１８：４１３１ＳＶＡ６０００２８６
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act intake manifold. They are then
vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act＊ drawn into the engine and burned.
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that Evaporative Emissions Control
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to System
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
also produces hydrocarbons. Con- work and what to do to maintain tank, an evaporative emissions
trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how control canister filled with charcoal
and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
ment. Under certain conditions of canister while the engine is off. After
＊
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC In Canada, Honda vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
Carbon monoxide does not contri- requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
bute to smog creation, but it is a agreement with Environment
poisonous gas. Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
manufactured. Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
283
０５／０８／０２１５：１８：５４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２８７
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls then controls how much fuel to inject Replacement Parts
The exhaust emissions controls under all operating conditions. The emissions control systems are
include three or four systems: PGM- designed and certified to work to-
FI, ignition timing control, exhaust Ignition Timing Control System gether in reducing emissions to
gas recirculation (DX, LX, and EX), This system constantly adjusts the levels that comply with the Clean Air
and three way catalytic converter. ignition timing, reducing the amount Act. To make sure the emissions
These systems work together to of HC, CO, and NOx produced. remain low, you should use only new
control the engine’s combustion and Honda replacement parts or their
minimize the amount of HC, CO, and Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) equivalent for repairs. Using lower
NOx that comes out the tailpipe. The System quality parts may increase the
exhaust emissions control systems On DX, LX, and EX models emissions from your vehicle.
are separate from the crankcase and The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
evaporative emissions control system takes some of the exhaust The emissions control systems are
systems. gas and routes it back into the intake covered by warranties separate from
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System air/fuel mixture reduces the amount warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI system uses sequential of NOx produced when the fuel is tion.
multiport fuel injection. It has three burned.
subsystems: air intake, engine
control, and fuel control. The Three Way Catalytic Converter
powertrain control module (PCM) in The three way catalytic converter is
automatic transmission vehicles or in the exhaust system. Through
the engine control module (ECM) in chemical reactions, it converts HC,
manual transmission vehicles uses CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
various sensors to determine how to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
much air is going into the engine. It (N2), and water vapor.
284
０５／０８／０２１５：１９：０５３１ＳＶＡ６０００２８８
Three Way Catalytic Converter
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX Si model Always use unleaded gasoline.

Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and

repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER running properly.
The three way catalytic converter for the chemical reactions to take
contains precious metals that serve place. It can set on fire any
as catalysts, promoting chemical combustible materials that come
reactions to convert the exhaust near it. Park your vehicle away from
gasses without affecting the metals. high grass, dry leaves, or other
The catalytic converter is referred to flammables.
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement A defective three way catalytic
unit must be an original Honda part converter contributes to air pollution,
or its equivalent. and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
The three way catalytic converter protect your vehicle’s three way
must operate at a high temperature catalytic converter.
285
０５／０８／０２１５：１９：１７３１ＳＶＡ６０００２８９
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes Make sure the vehicle has been the cruise control. When traffic
If you take your vehicle for a state parked with the engine off for 6 allows, drive for 90 seconds
emissions test shortly after the hours or more. without moving the accelerator
battery has been disconnected or pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
gone dead, it may not pass the test. Make sure the ambient slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness temperature is between 40° and do this for a continuous 90
codes’’ that must be set in the on- 95°F. seconds because of traffic
board diagnostics for the emissions conditions, drive for at least 30
systems. These codes are erased Without touching the accelerator seconds, then repeat it two more
when the battery is disconnected, pedal, start the engine, and let it times (for a total of 90 seconds).
and set again only after several days idle for 20 seconds.
of driving under a variety of Then drive in city/suburban
conditions. Keep the vehicle in Park traffic for at least 10 minutes.
(automatic transmission) or When traffic conditions allow, let
If the testing facility determines that neutral (manual transmission). the vehicle coast for several
the readiness codes are not set, you Increase the engine speed to 2,000 seconds without using the
will be requested to return at a later rpm, and hold it there until the accelerator pedal or the brake
date to complete the test. If you must temperature gauge rises to at least pedal.
get the vehicle retested within the 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).
next two or three days, you can Stop the vehicle, turn off the
condition the vehicle for retesting by Select a nearby lightly traveled ignition switch, and leave it off for
doing the following. major highway where you can 30 minutes.
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
Make sure the gas tank is nearly, (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 If the testing facility determines the
but not completely full (around minutes. Drive on the highway in readiness codes are still not set, see
3/4). D (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not use your dealer.
286
０５／０８／０２１５：１９：２１３１ＳＶＡ６０００２９０
Main Menu
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service
Information ................................. 288
Warranty Coverages ..................... 289
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 290

Authorized Manuals ...................... 291
287
０５／０８／０２１５：１９：３１３１ＳＶＡ６０００２９１
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
trained professionals. They should CUSTOMER RELATIONS us this information:
be able to answer all your questions. RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE
If you encounter a problem that your Honda Canada Inc. Vehicle identification number (see
dealership does not solve to your 715 Milner Avenue page 276 )
satisfaction, please discuss it with Toronto, ON
the dealership’s management. The M1B 2K8 Name and address of the dealer
service manager or general manager who services your vehicle
can help. Almost all problems are Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
solved in this way. Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909 Date of purchase
Toronto (416) 287-4776
If you are dissatisfied with the Mileage on your vehicle
decision made by the dealership’s In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
management, contact your Honda Islands: Your name, address, and
Customer Service Office. Bella International telephone number
P.O. Box 190816
U.S. Owners: San Juan, PR 00919-0816 A detailed description of the
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. problem
Automobile Customer Service Tel: (787) 620-7028
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A Name of the dealer who sold the
1919 Torrance Boulevard vehicle to you
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
288
０５／０８／０２１５：１９：４５３１ＳＶＡ６０００２９２
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty − provides prorated
warranties: covered for the useful life of the coverage for a replacement battery
vehicle. purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −

covers your new vehicle, except for Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the battery, emissions control − all exterior body panels are Limited Warranty − provides
systems, and accessories against covered for rust-through from the coverage for as long as the pur-
defects in materials and inside for the specified time period chaser of the muffler owns the
workmanship. with no mileage limit. vehicle.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Accessory Limited Warranty − Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Warranty and Emissions Honda accessories are covered all these warranties. Please read the
Performance Warranty − these two under this warranty. Time and 2006 Honda warranty information
warranties cover your vehicle’s mileage limits depend on the type of booklet that came with your vehicle
emissions control systems. Time, accessory and other factors. Please for precise information on warranty
mileage, and coverage are read your warranty booklet for coverages. Your vehicle’s original
conditional. Please read your details. tires are covered by their
warranty booklet for exact manufacturer. Tire warranty
information. Replacement Parts Limited information is in a separate booklet.
Warranty − covers all Honda
Original Equipment Battery Limited replacement parts against defects in Canadian Owners
Warranty − this warranty gives up materials and workmanship. Please refer to the 2006 warranty
to 100 percent credit toward a manual that came with your vehicle.
replacement battery.
289
０５／０８／０２１５：１９：５０３１ＳＶＡ６０００２９３
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar com- To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle
defect which could cause a crash or plaints, it may open an investigation, Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-
could cause injury or death, you and if it finds that a safety defect 4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
should immediately inform the exists in a group of vehicles, it may www.safercar.gov; or write to:
National Highway Traffic Safety order a recall and remedy campaign. Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Administration (NHTSA) in addition However, NHTSA cannot become Street, SW., Washington, DC, 20590.
to notifying American Honda Motor involved in individual problems You can also obtain other
Co., Inc. between you, your dealer, or information about motor vehicle
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. safety from www.safercar.gov.
290
０５／０８／０２１５：２０：０４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２９４
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) (NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Go online at www. helminc. com Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
at 1-800-782-4356. OR
Publication Form Description Price By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
Form Number Each＊ pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
61SNA00 2006 Honda Civic 2/4 door $75.00 Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Service Manual
Authorized Manuals
61SNA00EL 2006 Honda Civic 2/4 door $50.00 VEHICLE MODEL Price Total
PUBLICATION NUMBER Qty
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual ２ Name Year Each＊ Price
０
61SNA30 2006 Honda Civic 2/4 door $44.00 ０
Body Repair Manual ６
31SVA600 2006 Honda Civic 2-door $35.00
Owner’s Manual
Ｈ
Ｏ
31SNA700 2006 Honda Civic $29.00 Ｎ
Navigation System Manual
＊
31SNAM00 2006 Honda Civic $12.00 Prices are subject to change without TOTAL MATERIAL
Honda Service History notice and without incurring obligation.

Mich. Purchases
31SVAQ00 2006 Honda Civic 2-door $12.00 Add 6% Sales Tax
Quick Start Guide Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please HANDLING CHARGE $6.95
HON-R Order Form for Previous Years FREE allow adequate time for delivery.
GRAND TOTAL
Indicate Year and Model Desired
＊
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
291
０５／０８／０２１５：２０：１７３１ＳＶＡ６０００２９５
Authorized Manuals
NOTE: Dealers and companies, please provide dealer or company name, Service Manual:
and the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be
sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown This manual covers maintenance and recommended
below for a quotation. procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
Ｓ It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
Ｈ enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
Ｉ stand.
Customer Name Attention
Ｐ
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Ｔ Street Address − No P.O. Box Number Apartment Number
This manual complements the service manual by
Ｏ providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
City State & Zip Code
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Daytime Telephone Number ( )
Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only. replacement of damaged body parts.
Ｐ Do not send cash
Ａ Master VISA Check here if your billing address is different

Ｙ Card from the shipping address shown above.
Ｍ Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.
Ｅ −
Ｎ
Ｔ
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE
These publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
292
０５／０８／０２１５：２０：２４３１ＳＶＡ６０００２９６
Main Menu
Index
A Automatic Transmission............... 198 Parking ........................................ 101

Capacity, Fluid ........................... 278 System Design ........................... 203
Accessories and Modifications .... 186 Checking Fluid Level ................ 228 System Indicator .................. 58, 265
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Shifting ........................................ 198 Wear Indicators ......................... 203
Position) ........................................ 76 Shift Lever Position Braking System.............................. 203
Accessory Power Sockets............. 104 Indicators ................................ 198 Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 180
Adding Engine Coolant ................. 224 Shift Lever Positions ................. 198 Brightness Control, Instruments ... 71
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 221 Shift Lock Release ..................... 201 Brights, Headlights ......................... 70
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ........ 73 Bulb Replacement
Advice for Pregnant Women .......... 16 B Back-up Lights ........................... 236
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 21 Brake Lights............................... 236
Air Conditioning System ............... 110 Battery Front Parking Lights ................. 235
Usage .......................................... 113 Charging System Front Side Marker Lights......... 235
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 242 Indicator............................ 57, 263 Headlights .................................. 232
Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 180 Jump Starting ............................. 259 High-mount Brake Light .......... 237
Antifreeze ....................................... 224 Maintenance ............................... 248 Specifications ............................. 279
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Specifications ............................. 279 Turn Signal Lights ..................... 235
Indicator ................................ 59, 204 Before Driving ............................... 179 Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 232
Operation .................................... 204 Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 18
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 172 Beverage Holders .......................... 103 C
Anti-theft Steering Column Booster Seats ................................... 47
Lock ............................................... 76 Brakes Capacities Chart............................. 278
Audio System ................................. 115 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 204
INDEX
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 50
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ...... 78 Break-in, New Linings .............. 180 Carrying Cargo .............................. 188
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 19 Bulb Replacement ..................... 236
Automatic Speed Control.............. 175 Fluid ............................................ 230 CONTINUED
I
０５／０８／０２１５：２０：２９３１ＳＶＡ６０００２９７
Main Menu
Index
CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii Tethers.......................................... 45 Cruise Control Indicator ................. 61

CD Care .......................................... 169 Warning Labels ............................ 51 Cruise Control Operation ............. 175
CD Changer ........................... 131, 153 Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 33 Cup Holders.................................... 103
CD Changer Error Messages ...... 133 Child Seats Customer Service Information..... 288
CD Player ............................... 126, 146 Installing ....................................... 40
CD Player Error Messages .. 132, 154 Lower Anchors ............................ 41 D
Ceiling Light ................................... 106 Selecting ....................................... 39
Certification Label ......................... 276 Tether Anchor Points ................. 45 DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii
Chains, Tires .................................. 247 Cleaning Dashboard .................................... 3, 54
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 253 Seat Belts .................................... 237 Daytime Running Lights................. 71
Changing Oil Clock ............................................... 173 Daytime Running Lights
How to ......................................... 222 Clutch Fluid .................................... 231 Indicator ........................................ 61
When to....................................... 209 CO in the Exhaust ......................... 283 Dead Battery .................................. 259
Charging System Indicator .... 57, 263 Coat Hook ....................................... 104 Defects, Reporting Safety............. 290
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ............... 66 Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 194 Defogger, Rear Window ................. 72
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 193 Compact Spare Tire....................... 252 Defrosting the Windows ............... 114
Child Safety ...................................... 32 Console Compartment .................. 103 Dimensions ..................................... 278
Booster Seats ............................... 47 Consumer Information.................. 288 Dimming the Headlights ................ 70
Child Seats .................................... 39 Controls, Instruments and .............. 53 Dipstick
Important Safety Coolant Automatic Transmission........... 228
Reminders .......................... 32, 35 Adding ......................................... 224 Engine Oil ................................... 183
Infants ........................................... 37 Checking ..................................... 185 Directional Signals ........................... 70
Large Children ............................. 46 Proper Solution .......................... 224 Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 203
LATCH.......................................... 41 Temperature Gauge .................... 66 Disc Care ........................................ 169
Risks with Airbags....................... 33 Crankcase Emissions Control Disc Player ............................. 126, 146
Small Children.............................. 38 System......................................... 283 Display Change Button ................... 64
II
０５／０８／０２１５：２０：３６３１ＳＶＡ６０００２９８
Main Menu
Index
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 224 Overheated Engine ................... 261 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Doors Towing ........................................ 272 Belts by ......................................... 16
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.. 78 Emergency Brake .......................... 101
Locking and Unlocking ............... 77 Emergency Flashers ....................... 72 F
Power Door Locks ....................... 78 Emergency Towing ....................... 272
DOT Tire Quality Grading＊ ......... 280 Emergency Trunk Opener ............. 89 Fan Control..................................... 111
Downshifting, Manual Emissions Controls........................ 283 Features .......................................... 109
Transmission .............................. 195 Emissions Testing, State .............. 286 Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 181
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5 Engine Filters
Driving ............................................ 191 Adding Engine Coolant ............. 224 Dust and Pollen .......................... 239
Economy ..................................... 185 Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 66 Oil ................................................ 222
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 239 If It Won’t Start .......................... 257 Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 72
Malfunction Indicator Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 253
E Lamp ................................. 57, 264 Fluids
Oil Life Indicator........................ 209 Automatic Transmission........... 228
Economy, Fuel ............................... 185 Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 57, 263 Brake ........................................... 230
Emergencies................................... 251 Oil, Synthetic .............................. 221 Clutch .......................................... 230
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 259 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 220 Manual Transmission ............... 229
Brake System Indicator ............ 265 Overheating................................ 261 Power Steering........................... 231
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 253 Specifications ............................. 278 Windshield Washer ................... 227
Charging System Indicator ...... 263 Speed Limiter ..................... 197, 200 FM Stereo Radio
Checking the Fuses................... 266 Starting........................................ 194 Reception .................................... 167
Hazard Warning Flashers .......... 72 Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 180
INDEX
Folding Rear Seat ............................ 94
Jump Starting ............................. 259 Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 283 Four-way Flashers ........................... 72
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 263 Exhaust Fumes ................................ 50
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 264 CONTINUED
III
０５／０８／０２１５：２０：４３３１ＳＶＡ６０００２９９
Main Menu
Index
Front Airbags ............................... 9, 23 Gauges High Altitude, Starting at .............. 194

Front Seat Engine Coolant Temperature .... 66 High Beam Lever............................. 70
Adjusting ....................................... 90 Fuel ................................................ 66 High-mount Brake Light............... 237
Airbags ...................................... 9, 23 Gearshift Lever Positions Hood, Opening and Closing the ... 182
Fuel .................................................. 180 Automatic Transmission........... 198 Horn................................................... 68
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ........... 66 Manual Transmission ............... 196 Hydraulic Clutch ............................ 231
Economy ..................................... 185 Glove Box ....................................... 103
Fill Door and Cap....................... 181 Gross Axle Weight Rating I
Gauge ............................................ 66 (GAWR) ...................................... 189
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 62 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Identification Number, Vehicle.... 276
Octane Requirement ................. 180 (GVWR) ...................................... 189 If the Engine Overheats ............... 261
Oxygenated ................................ 180 If the Engine Wont Start ............... 257
Tank, Refueling ......................... 181 H Ignition
Fuse Locations ............................... 270 Keys............................................... 74
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 266 Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 232 Switch ............................................ 76
Hazard Warning Flashers............... 72 Timing Control System ............. 284
G Headlights Immobilizer System......................... 75
Aiming ......................................... 232 Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 185 Daytime Running Lights............. 71 Indicators
Gasohol ........................................... 180 High Beam Indicator ................... 61 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake)............... 59
Gasoline .......................................... 180 Reminder Beeper ......................... 70 Brake (Parking and Brake
Gauge ............................................ 66 Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 232 System) ..................................... 58
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 62 Turning on .................................... 70 Charging System ................. 57, 263
Octane Requirement ................. 180 Head Restraints ............................... 93 Cruise Control .............................. 61
Tank, Refueling ......................... 181 Heated Mirrors .............................. 101 DRL (Daytime Running
Gas Station Procedures................. 181 Heating and Cooling ...................... 110 Lights)....................................... 61
IV
０５／０８／０２１５：２０：５１３１ＳＶＡ６０００３００
Main Menu
Index
High Beam .................................... 61 Instrument Panel ......................... 3, 54 Turn Signal ................................... 70

Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 59 Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 71 Load Limits..................................... 189
Lights ON ..................................... 62 Instrument and Controls................. 53 LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 76
Low Fuel ....................................... 62 Interior Lights ................................ 106 Locks
Low Oil Pressure ................. 57, 263 Introduction ......................................... i Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 76
Maintenance Minder........... 60, 209 Fuel Fill Door ............................. 181
Malfunction Lamp ..................... 264 J Power Door .................................. 78
REV Limit ..................................... 60 Trunk ............................................ 88
Security System ........................... 62 Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 254 Low Coolant Level ......................... 185
Side Airbag Off ............................ 58 Jack, Tire ........................................ 253 Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 62
SRS ................................................ 58 Jump Starting ................................. 259 Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 57, 263
Trunk Open .................................. 61 Lower Anchors................................. 41
Turn Signal and Hazard K Lower Gear, Downshifting to a.... 195
Warning .................................... 59 Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 278
Washer Level ............................... 61 Keys ................................................... 74 Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ............ 188
Indicators, Instrument
Panel ........................................ 55, 57 L
Infant Restraint ................................ 37
Infant Seats Label, Certification ........................ 276
Installing ....................................... 40 Lane Change, Signaling .................. 70
Tether Anchor Points ................. 45 Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 14, 19
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 242 LATCH System ................................ 41
Information Display ......................... 63 Lights
INDEX
Inside Mirror .................................. 100 Bulb Replacement ..................... 232
Inspection, Tire .............................. 243 Indicators ................................ 55, 57
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 40 Parking .......................................... 70 CONTINUED
V
０５／０８／０２１５：２０：５８３１ＳＶＡ６０００３０１
Main Menu
Index
M New Vehicle Break-in ................... 180 P

Normal Shift Speeds...................... 196
Maintenance ................................... 207 NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i Panel Brightness Control ............... 71
Items ................................... 212, 215 Numbers, Identification ................ 276 Park Gear Position......................... 199
Minder......................................... 209 Parking ............................................ 202
Minder Indicator .................. 60, 209 O Parking Brake ................................ 101
Owner’s Maintenance Parking Brake and Brake
Checks .................................... 214 Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 180 System Indicator .................. 58, 265
Record .................................. 216-217 Odometer .......................................... 64 Parking Lights ......................... 70, 235
Safety........................................... 208 Odometer, Trip ................................ 64 Parking Over Things that
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 57, 264 Oil Burn..................................... 202, 285
Manual Transmission.................... 195 Change, How to ......................... 222 PC Card ........................................... 147
Checking Fluid Level ................ 229 Change, When to ....................... 209 PGM-FI System.............................. 284
Shifting ........................................ 195 Checking Engine ....................... 183 Playing a Disc ......................... 126, 146
Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 229 Pressure Indicator ............... 57, 263 Playing a PC Card .......................... 146
Mats, Floor ..................................... 238 Selecting Proper Viscosity Pollen Filter .................................... 239
Meters, Gauges ................................ 63 Chart ....................................... 221 Power Door Locks ........................... 78
Methanol in Gasoline .................... 180 ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 76 Power Socket Locations ....... 102, 104
Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 100 Onboard Refueling Vapor Power Steering Fluid ..................... 231
Modifying Your Vehicle................ 187 Recovery ..................................... 283 Power Windows ............................... 96
Moonroof .......................................... 98 Outside Mirrors ............................. 100 Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 16
MP3 ................................. 127, 147, 156 Overheating, Engine ..................... 261 Preparing to Drive ......................... 193
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 214 Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
N Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 180 Additional Safety Precautions .... 16
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Neutral Gear Position.................... 199
VI
０５／０８／０２１５：２１：０５３１ＳＶＡ６０００３０２
Main Menu
Index
Protecting Children ......................... 32 Reclining the Seat-backs ................. 90 S

General Guideline ........................ 32 Recommended Shift Speeds ........ 196
Installing a Child Seat ................. 40 Refueling ......................................... 181 Safety Belts................................... 8, 18
Protecting Infants ........................ 37 Reminder Indicators.................. 55, 57 Safety Defects, Reporting＊ .......... 290
Protecting Larger Children ........ 46 Remote Transmitter ........................ 85 Safety Features .................................. 7
Protecting Small Children .......... 38 Replacement Information Airbags ............................................ 9
Selecting a Child Seat.................. 39 Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 239 Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Using Child Seats with Engine Oil and Filter ................. 222 Safety Labels, Location of .............. 51
Tethers...................................... 45 Fuses ........................................... 266 Safety Messages ................................ ii
Using LATCH .............................. 41 Light Bulbs ................................. 232 Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 18
Maintenance Minder ................. 209 Additional Information ................ 18
R Spark Plugs................................. 278 Automatic Seat Belt
Tires and Wheels ....................... 246 Tensioners ................................ 19
Radiator Overheating .................... 261 Wiper Blades .............................. 239 Cleaning ...................................... 237
Radio/Disc Sound System ............ 116 Replacing Seat Belts After a Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 19
Radio/Disc/PC Card Sound Crash ............................................. 20 Maintenance ................................. 20
System......................................... 134 Reporting Safety Defects＊ ........... 290 Reminder Indicator and
Recommended Tire Pressures .... 242 Reserve Tank, Engine Beeper ................................. 18, 57
Radio Theft Protection.................. 172 Coolant ................................ 185, 224 System Components.................... 18
Readiness Codes .................... 264, 286 Restraint, Child ................................ 32 Use During Pregnancy................ 16
Rear Lights, Bulb Reverse Gear Position................... 199 Wearing a Lap/Shoulder
Replacement ............................... 236 Reverse Lockout ............................ 197 Belt ...................................... 14, 19
Rear Seat Access ............................. 92 Rotation, Tire ................................. 244
INDEX
Seats .................................................. 90
Rear Seat, Folding ........................... 94 Seats, Folding Rear.......................... 94
Rear View Mirror........................... 100
Rear Window Defogger .................. 72 CONTINUED
VII
０５／０８／０２１５：２１：１０３１ＳＶＡ６０００３０３
Main Menu
Index
Security System ............................. 174 SRS, Additional Information........... 21 Stereo Sound System .................... 115
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 39 Additional Safety Precautions .... 31 Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 250
Serial Number ................................ 276 Airbag Service .............................. 30 Supplemental Restraint
Service Intervals ............................ 209 Airbag System Components ....... 21 System................................... 9, 21
Service Manual＊ ............................ 291 How the Passenger Airbag Servicing ....................................... 30
Service Station Procedures .......... 181 Off Indicator Works ................ 29 SRS Indicator.......................... 28, 58
Setting the Clock ........................... 173 How the Side Airbag Off System Components.................... 21
Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 198 Indicator Works ....................... 29 SVC .......................................... 120, 144
Shift Lock Release ......................... 201 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 28 Synthetic Oil ................................... 221
Side Airbags ................................. 9, 26 How Your Front Airbags
Off Indicator ........................... 29, 58 Work.......................................... 23 T
Side Curtain Airbags ................... 9, 28 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 26
Side Marker Lights, Bulb How Your Side Curtain Airbags Taillights, Changing Bulbs ........... 236
Replacement ............................... 235 Work.......................................... 28 Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 251
Signaling Turns ................................ 70 SRS Indicator.............................. 28, 58 Technical Descriptions
Snow Chains ................................... 247 START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 76 DOT Tire Quality Grading＊ ..... 280
Snow Tires ...................................... 246 Starting the Engine........................ 194 Emissions Control Systems ...... 283
Sockets, Accessory Power ............ 104 In Cold Weather at High Oxygenated Fuels...................... 180
Sound System ................................. 115 Altitude ................................... 194 Three Way Catalytic
Spare Tire With a Dead Battery ................. 259 Converter........................ 284, 285
Inflating ....................................... 252 State Emissions Testing ............... 286 Temperature Gauge ........................ 66
Specifications ............................. 279 Steam Coming from Engine ......... 261 Tether Anchor Points...................... 45
Spark Plugs ..................................... 278 Steering Wheel Theft Protection, Radio................. 172
Specifications ................................. 278 Adjustments ................................. 73 Three Way Catalytic
Speed Control ................................. 175 Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 76 Converter ............................ 284, 285
Speed Limiter ......................... 197, 200 Steering Wheel Buttons........ 170, 175 Tilt the Steering Wheel................... 73
VIII
０５／０８／０２１５：２１：１７３１ＳＶＡ６０００３０４
Main Menu
Index
Time, Setting the ........................... 173 Identification Number............... 277 Vehicle Identification Number..... 276
Tire Chains ..................................... 247 Shifting the Automatic .............. 198 Vehicle Storage .............................. 250
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 253 Shifting the Manual ................... 195 Ventilation ...................................... 112
Tires ................................................ 241 Treadwear＊ .................................... 280 VIN .................................................. 276
Air Pressure ............................... 242 Treadwear Indicators .................... 243 Viscosity, Oil................................... 221
Checking Wear .......................... 243 Trip Meter ........................................ 64
Compact Spare ........................... 252 Trunk................................................. 88 W
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 280 Emergency Opener ..................... 89
Inflation ....................................... 241 Opening......................................... 88 WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii
Inspection ................................... 243 Open Indicator ............................. 61 Warning Button, Hazard ................. 72
Labeling ...................................... 282 Turn Signals ..................................... 70 Warning Labels, Location of .......... 51
Maintenance ............................... 244 Warranty Coverages ..................... 289
Replacing .................................... 245 U Washer, Windshield
Rotating....................................... 244 Checking the Fluid Level ......... 227
Snow ............................................ 246 Unexpected, Taking Care Indicator ........................................ 61
Specifications ............................. 279 of the ........................................... 251 Operation ...................................... 69
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 253 Uniform Tire Quality Grading＊ ... 280 Wheels
Towing Unleaded Gasoline......................... 180 Adjusting the Steering ................ 73
A Trailer ...................................... 205 Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 224 Alignment and Balance ............. 244
Emergency Wrecker ................. 272 Using a Booster Seat ....................... 47 Compact Spare ........................... 252
Transmission Replacing .................................... 245
Checking Fluid Level, V Wrench, Nut ............................... 254
Automatic ............................... 228
INDEX
Windows
Checking Fluid Level, Vanity Mirror ................................. 105 Operating the Power ................... 96
Manual .................................... 229 Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 189 Rear, Defogger ............................ 72
Fluid Selection ................... 228, 229 Vehicle Dimensions....................... 278
IX
０５／０８／０２１５：２１：２１３１ＳＶＡ６０００３０５
Main Menu
Index
Windshield
Cleaning ........................................ 69
Defroster .................................... 114
Washers ........................................ 69
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 239
Operation ...................................... 69
WMA ............................... 127, 147, 156
Worn Tires ..................................... 243
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 272
＊
: U.S. only
X
０５／０８／０２１５：２１：４７３１ＳＶＡ６０００３０６
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Automatic Transmission Fluid: use ATF (see page 231 ).

DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX: Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane Transmission Fluid) preferred, or Brake Fluid:
number of 87 or higher. a DEXRON III ATF as a Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
Si: temporary replacement (see page DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
Premium unleaded gasoline, 228 ). DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
pump octane number of 91 or replacement (see page 230 ).
higher. Manual Transmission Fluid:
Honda Manual Transmission Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Fuel Tank Capacity: Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30 DX, Canadian DX-G
13.2 US gal (50 ) or 10W-40 motor oil as a Front/Rear:
temporary replacement (see page 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Recommended Engine Oil: 229 ). LX, EX
DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX: Front/Rear:
API Premium grade 5W-20 Capacity (including differential): 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
detergent oil (see page 221 ). DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX: Si (with standard tires)
1.5 US qt (1.4 ) Front:
Oil change capacity (including Si: 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
filter): 1.6 US qt (1.5 ) Rear:
3.9 US qt (3.7 ) 29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
Si: Power Steering Fluid: Si (with optional tires)
API Premium grade 5W-30 All models except Si: Front/Rear:
detergent oil (see page 221 ). Honda Power Steering Fluid 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Oil change capacity (including preferred, or another brand of
filter): power steering fluid as a Spare Tire:
4.6 US qt (4.4 ) temporary replacement. Do not 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Manual Civic

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Civic

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2006 Civic 2 Door

OWNER This owner’s manual should be considered

This owner’s manual covers all models of

The information and specifications included

DEALER NAME DEALER NO. POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN

A Few Words About Safety

Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3

Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 191

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 291

Contents Before Driving Warranty and Customer

Features Technical Information

Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL HAZARD WARNING MOONROOF SWITCH (P.98)

Your Vehicle at a Glance

DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG

Your Vehicle at a Glance

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents

Important Safety Precautions

Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts Help keep you from being thrown

Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags can pose hazards. To do

Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

4.Adjust the Head Restraints When a passenger is seated in the

Driver and Passenger Safety

Adjust the seat-back to an

Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Make sure all seat belts are

If necessary, pull up on the belt again

Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Do not attach or place objects on

Do not attach hard objects on or

Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety